All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
D3NO-EE47F
OWNER'S
MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual
in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet
Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page
8-5 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
F5
A000A01A-GAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S I.D.
ORIGINAL: NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
DATE OF SALE:
SUBSEQUENT: NAME:
ADDRESS: STREET:
TOWN:
COUNTRY:
P.CODE:
TRANSFER DATE:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1
Introduction
21
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strongly
recommend that you read the entire
manual. In order to minimize the
chance of death or injury, you must
read the WARNING and CAUTION
sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in
this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you learn about features,
important safety information, and driv-
ing tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents. A
good place to start is the index; it has
an alphabetical listing of all informa-
tion in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were pre-
pared to enhance your personal safe-
ty.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommenda-
tions provided in these WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
13
Introduction
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance,
we recommend you use unleaded
gasoline which has an octane rating
of RON (Research Octane Number)
95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or
higher. (Do not use methanol blend-
ed fuels.)
You may use unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI
87~90 but it may result in slight per-
formance reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new Hyundai vehicle is
designed to use only unleaded fuel
having an Octane Rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI
(Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher. (Do
not use methanol blended fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental
to the catalytic converter and
will damage the engine control
system’s oxygen sensor and
affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been speci-
fied. (Consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for details.)
Introduction
41
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alco-
hol) are being marketed along with or
instead of leaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained
fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age. Also, the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) may illuminate or cause
plugging, misfiring, poor acceleration,
engine stalling, catalyst melting,
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc-
tion, etc.
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding
fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in
your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage
to the fuel system and any per-
formance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels con-
taining methanol or fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol. Discontinue use
of any gasohol product which
impairs drivability.
15
Introduction
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded gasoline which has an
octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good
quality gasoline including fuel addi-
tives regularly, and have problems
starting or the engine does not run
smoothly, one bottle of additives
added to the fuel tank at every
15,000km (for Europe)/5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are avail-
able from your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer along with information on how
to use them.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles)
you may add to the performance,
economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-
tion.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Towing hook............................................6-26
2. Front view camera ................................4-116
3. Hood .......................................................4-33
4. Front windshield wiper blades .....4-124, 7-31
5. Sunroof ...................................................4-38
6. Outside rearview mirror ..........................4-51
7. Door locks...............................................4-16
8. Tires and wheels .............................7-39, 8-3
9. Headlamps ...........................................4-117
10. Front fog light......................................4-122
OVI013001
■ Front view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Glass antenna and Defroster ....4-166, 4-132
2. High mounted stop lamp ........................7-73
3. Rear combination lamp ..........................7-73
4. Rearview camera..................................4-112
5. Parking assist system...........................4-107
6. Towing hook............................................6-26
7. Fuel filler lid ............................................4-35
8. Door locks...............................................4-16
OVI013002L
■ Rear view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ............................4-17
2. Driver’s seat control ............................3-4
3. Driver position memory system
button ................................................4-42
4. Power window switch ........................4-28
5. Outside rearview mirror control ........4-52
6. Fuel-filler lid opener ..........................4-35
7. BSD on/off button ..............................5-78
8. Parking assist system on/off
button ..............................................4-107
9. Instrument panel illumination
control lever ......................................4-56
10. HUD on/off button..........................4-104
11. ESC off button ................................5-36
12. Trunk lid release switch or
power trunk main control switch ......4-20
13. Electric parking brake switch ..........5-26
14. Brake pedal ....................................5-23
15. Accelerator pedal ..............................5-9
16. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever ....................................4-45
17. Heated steering wheel on/off
button ..............................................4-45
18. Steering wheel ................................4-44
OVI014003
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster..............................4-55
2. Lighting control lever ......................4-118
3. Wiper and washer control lever ......4-124
4. Horn ..................................................4-46
5. Driver’s front air bag .........................3-57
6. Engine start/stop button ......................5-6
7. Hazard warning flasher ......................6-2
8. Climate control system ....................4-133
9. SBW(Shift by wire) control lever........5-11
10. Climate control system seat ............3-11
11. Around view monitoring system
on/off button ..................................4-116
12. Vehicle height control button ..........5-46
13. Rear curtain folding button ............4-164
14. Center console storage box ..........4-152
15. Passenger’s front air bag ................3-57
16. Glove box ......................................4-152
OVI014004
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-22
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-23
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-24
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-27
5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-19
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-20
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-26
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-49
9. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-25
10. Jump start connector ........................6-5
OBH011100
■
3.8 Engine
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
27
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-22
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-23
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-24
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-27
5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-19
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-20
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-26
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-49
9. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-25
10. Jump start connector ........................6-5
11. Chamber air cleaner ......................7-28
OBH011101
■
5.0 Engine
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
• Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-50
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward**/ Seat height and cushion
tilting adjustment
(2) Seat cushion length adjustment
(3) Seatback angle adjustment
(4) Headrest height adjustment
(5) Driver position memory system
(6) Climate control system seat*
(7) Lumbar support adjustment
Front passenger’s seat
(8) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward/ Seat height and cushion
tilting adjustment*
(9) Seatback angle adjustment
(10) Headrest height adjustment
(11) Climate control system seat*
SEATS
OVI033001
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type C
33
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear seat
(12) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward adjustment with seatback
angle adjustment
(13) Climate control system seat*
(14) Armrest
(15) Leg support angle adjustment
(16) Headrest height adjustment
(17) Easy access
(18) Front passenger side walk-in
seat
(19) Rear relaxation seat system
(20) Lumber support adjustment
(21) Return switch
(22) Foot rest adjustment
(23) Passenger seat adjustment
switch*
*: if equipped
**: The height of the driver's headrest
is automatically adjusted simulta-
neously with the driver's seat slid-
ing adjustment operation.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Loose objects in the driver’s
foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Do not place anything under the
front seats.
WARNING - Driver
responsibility for passen-
gers
Riding in a vehicle with the
seatback reclined could lead to
serious or fatal injury in an acci-
dent. If a seat is reclined during
an accident, the occupant’s
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt applying
great force to the unprotected
abdomen. Serious or fatal inter-
nal injuries could result. The
driver must advise the passen-
ger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a seat cushion that
reduces friction between the
seat and passenger. The pas-
senger's hips may slide under
the lap portion of the seat belt
during an accident or a sudden
stop. Serious or fatal internal
injuries could result because
the seat belt can't operate nor-
mally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident
causing death, serious injury,
or property damage.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Front seat adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switch located on
the doors. Before driving, adjust the
seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instru-
ment panel.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may
cause strong pressure on the
abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may gush
out of the lighter and cause
fire.
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between the
seat and the center console.
Your hands might be cut or
injured by the sharp edges of
the seat mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the
rear seats, be careful while
adjusting the front seat posi-
tion.
(Continued)
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in serious or fatal
injury in a sudden stop or col-
lision.
• Always drive and ride with
your seatback upright and the
lap portion of the seat belt
snug and low across the hips.
This is the best position to
protect you in case of an acci-
dent.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back
as possible from the steering
wheel while maintaining com-
fortable control of the vehicle.
We recommend that your
chest be at least 250 mm (10
inches) away from the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the engine start/stop button in
OFF.
Therefore, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
When adjusting the seat position, the
headrest will be adjusted simultane-
ously to the proper position.
Cushion length adjustment
(for driver’s seat)
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat cushion
to the desired length. Release the
switch once the seat cushion reach-
es the desired length.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is com-
pleted. Excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary battery drain,
don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while
the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control knobs at the
same time. Doing so may result
in power seat motor or electri-
cal component malfunction.
OVI033002
OVI039003
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Seatback angle
Push the upper part of the control
switch forward or backward to move
the seatback to the desired angle.
Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height
Push the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion.
Push the rear portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the height of the seat cushion.
Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch. Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, press the switch (3) or (4).
OVI033004 OVI033005 OVI033006
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and com-
fort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passen-
ger, but also helps to protect the
head and neck in the event of a colli-
sion.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or backward by pulling the
lower part of the headrest forward or
backward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
OBH038075L
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at
the same height as the center
of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of
gravity of most people's head
is similar with the height of
the top of their eyes. Also,
adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For
this reason, the use of a cush-
ion that holds the body away
from the seatback is not rec-
ommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed
as severe injury to the occu-
pants may occur in the event
of an accident. Headrests may
provide protection against
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest
position of the driver's seat
while the vehicle is in motion.
OVI039007
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Adjusting the headrest up and down
Push the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the headrest. Release
the switch once the headrest reach-
es the desired position.
Removal
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recliner control switch (1).
2. Raise it as far as it can go by
pulling the switch up (3) then pull
the headrest up (4).
OVI039010 OVI033101N
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
OYFH034205
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback
towards the front with the head-
rest and seat cushion raised,
the headrest may come in con-
tact with the sunvisor or other
parts of the vehicle.
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Reinstall
To reinstall the headrest:
1. Raise it as far as it can go by
pulling the switch up (1).
2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes and then pull the switch
down (3) until the headrest moves
to the lowest position.
3. To install the headrest securely,
move the headrest up and down 2
or 3 times by pulling the switch up
and down.
4. Recline the seatback (5) with the
recliner control switch (4).
5. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING
• If you don't install the head-
rest securely, the active head-
rest may not operate normally.
When reinstalling the head-
rest, install it securely as pro-
cedures.
• Always make sure the head-
rest locks into position after
reinstalling and adjusting it
properly.
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed
as severe injury to the occu-
pants may occur in the event
of an accident. Headrests may
provide protection against
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
CAUTION
Do not reinstall the headrest at
the incorrect position other than
the highest position and do not
force it. It causes damage to the
headrest.
OVI033102N
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Electronic active headrest
The electronic active headrest is
designed to trigger the headrest for-
ward and upward when impact sen-
sor detects a rear impact. This helps
to prevent the driver's and front pas-
senger’s heads from moving back-
ward and thus helps minimize neck
injuries.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the
driver's seat or the front passenger's
seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat
changes as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the engine
start/stop button is turned to the
ON position.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
OBH038069
CAUTION
The active headrest is a safety
device to reduce injuries from a
rear impact. Do not hit or pull
the headrest intentionally.
OVI033011
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Climate control system seat
(if equipped)
This feature cools or warms the front
seats by blowing air through small
vent hole on the surface of the seats
and seatbacks.
While the engine is running, push the
rear portion of the switch to cool or
warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat (if equipped).
When the operation of the climate
control system seat is not needed,
keep the switches in the OFF posi-
tion.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover.
It may damage the seat
warmer or climate control sys-
tem seat.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. The
occupants must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too
warm and to turn the seat
warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must
exercise extreme care for the
following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
OVI033013K
Safety features of your vehicle
123
(Continued)
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspapers
under the seats. The air vent
may not work properly as the
air intake can be blocked.
• Do not change the seat cover.
It may damage the seat
warmer or climate control sys-
tem seat.
• When the air vent does not
operate, restart the vehicle. If
there is no change, we recom-
mend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the climate
control system operating, the cli-
mate control system seat will turn
OFF.
• The climate control system seat
defaults to the OFF position when-
ever the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position.
• With the climate control system
seat ON to cool or warm the front
seats, the system turns off or on
automatically depending on the
seat temperature.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
CAUTION
• The climate control system
seat is a supplementary cool-
ing and warming system. Use
the climate control seat when
the climate control system is
on. Using the climate control
seat for prolonged periods of
time with the climate control
system off could cause the cli-
mate control seat perform-
ance to be reduced.
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the sur-
face of the front seats and
seatbacks, or the air vent
holes may be blocked and pre-
vented from working properly.
(Continued)
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
Rear seat adjustment
The rear seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the door.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
OVI039013
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the engine start/stop button in
OFF. Therefore, children should
never be left unattended in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is com-
pleted. Excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large
amount of electrical power. To
prevent unnecessary battery
drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary
while the engine is not run-
ning.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
result in power seat motor or
electrical component malfunc-
tion.
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Forward, backward and seatback
angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Easy access switch
Your vehicle features easy access
system to provide convenient access
for rear passengers. When opening
the rear door, the rear seats will
move rearward automatically to
make passenger get off easily. This
easy access system will operate only
when the control switch is in "ON"
position.
WARNING
Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may
cause strong pressure on the
abdomen.
WARNING
Do not operate the rear power
seat while the child seat is
installed.
OVI032018C
OVI039019
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Type A
After pressing the FRONT switch,
you can adjust the front passenger
seat forward and backward (1), and
adjust the seat back angle (2).
Type B, C
Additional switches are provided to
move front passenger seat forward
and backward (1), and adjust the seat-
back angle (2) from the rear seats.
Type D
While pressing the button, the front
passenger seat moves forward and
backward, and adjusts the seatback
angle.
Additional switches for adjusting the front passenger seat (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVI033014/OVI033081/OVI033016N/OVI033015N
■ Type C
■ Type D
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Lumbar support
(for rear right and left passenger’s
seat) (if equipped)
• For right side :
Press the R switch.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch. Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, press the switch (3) or (4).
• For left side :
Press the L switch.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch. Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch (2) to
decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, press the switch (3) or (4).
Rear switches operating limi-
tation (if equipped)
Type A
• LOCK ON : When the switch is
pressed, the indicator will illumi-
nate and switch lock function is
operated.
OVI033029
OVI033082
OVI033083
■ Type A
■ Type B
317
Safety features of your vehicle
• LOCK OFF : When the switch is
pressed, the indicator will illumi-
nate and switch lock is cancelled.
Type B
• LOCK : When the switch is
pressed, the indicator will illumi-
nate and switch lock function is
operated. If you press again, the
indicator will turn off and switch
lock is cancelled.
❈ If your vehicle is for 2 seater in rear
seat, the switch lock is controlled
by AVN. Refer to the AVN manual.
VIP Convenience function
(3 seat configuration)
The rear seat passenger may use
the switches to control the rear right
seat or front passenger seat.
Front passenger side walk-in seat
Press the switch (1);
The seatback will adjust.
Press the switch (2);
The seat will move forward and back-
ward.
OVI033017
OVI033018
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVI039062
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Rear relaxation seat system
Press the switch (3);
The front passenger seat and the
rear right side passenger seat will
move to its original position. After the
operation is completed, a beep will
sound.
Press the switch (4);
The front passenger seat will move
forward and the seatback will fold
automatically. Then the rear right
side passenger seat seatback will
lean towards the back of the vehicle.
After the operation is completed, a
beep will sound once.
VIP Convenience function
(2 seat configuration)
The rear seat passenger may use
the switches to control the rear right
seat or front passenger seat.
Front passenger side walk-in seat
Press the switch (1);
The passenger seat will move for-
ward and the seatback will fold auto-
matically.
If you want to use as seat, press the
switch (3).
OVI033091
OVI033092
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVI039062OVI033063N
319
Safety features of your vehicle
Rear relaxation seat system
Press the switch (2);
The front passenger seat will move
forward and the seatback will fold
automatically. And then the rear right
seat cushion will move forward and
leg support will move up. While oper-
ating the system, if you press the
switch again, the system will stop.
When the operation is completed,
the buzzer beeps.
Return function (Sedan)
While the seat is moving by relax
mode operation, if the switch (3) is
pressed shortly, the rear seat is
moved to rearmost position.
However, if the switch (3) is pressed
more than 1 second, the rear seat is
moved to rearmost position and the
leg support is moved down. The front
passenger seat will automatically
move to its original position. When
the operation is completed, the
buzzer beeps.
Return function (Limousine)
While the seat is moving by relax
mode operation, if the switch (3) is
pressed shortly, the seat is moved to
previous mode.
However, if the switch (3) is pressed
more than 1 second, the rear seat is
moved to rearmost position and the
leg support is moved down. The front
passenger seat will automatically
move to its original position. When
the operation is completed, the
buzzer beeps.
Leg support
• Press the switch (4);
The leg support will move down.
• Press the switch (5);
The leg support will move up.
Foot rest
• Press the switch (6);
The foot rest will move down.
• Press the switch (7);
The foot rest will move up.
OVI039063
Safety features of your vehicle
203
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and com-
fort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
OBH038076L
* : if equipped
*
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at
the same height of the center
of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of
gravity of most people's head
is similar with the height of
the top of their eyes. Also
adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. The
use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seat-
back is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed
as severe injury to an occu-
pant may occur in the event of
an accident. Headrests may
provide protection against
severe neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When there is no occupant in
the rear seats, adjust the
height of the headrest to the
lowest position. The rear seat
headrest can reduce the visi-
bility of the rear area.
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the headrest up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Adjusting the headrest up and down
(electric) (if equipped)
Push the control switch up to raise or
down to lower the headrest. Release
the switch once the headrest reach-
es the desired position.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or backward by pulling the
lower part of the headrest forward or
backward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
OVI033094OVI033023
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to
properly protects the occupants.
OVI039021
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Wing-out (if equipped)
For rear passenger comfort, the
ends of the headrest can be adjusted
inward.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull the knob (1)
(if equipped) forward from the seat-
back.
Cup holder (if equipped)
To use the cup holder, push the but-
ton (1).
OVI039024
OVI033025
OVI033026
323
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• To reduce the risk of injury in
an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the tower console
storage closed while driving.
• Close this lower and upper lid
while the vehicle is moving.
Failure to observe this instruc-
tion could cause death or seri-
ous injury.
Storage compartment (if equipped)
To use the storage compartment,
push the button (2). Close the cover
after use.
Rear tower console storage
(if equipped)
These compartments can be used to
store small items.
To open the upper console storage,
press the button (2) and to open the
lower console storage, press the but-
ton (1). Close the tower console stor-
age after use.
OVI033027
OVI039030
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to warm the rear seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat
changes as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatical-
ly depending on the seat tempera-
ture.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OVI033093
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene, alco-
hol and gasoline. Doing so may
damage the surface of the
heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything
on the seats that insulates
against heat, such as blankets,
cushions or seat covers while
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the
seat warming components
could occur.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Climate control system seat
(if equipped)
This feature cools or warms the rear
seats by blowing air through small
vent hole on the surface of the seats
and seatbacks.
While the engine is running, push the
rear portion of the switch to cool or
warm the rear seats.
When the operation of the the climate
control system seat is not needed,
keep the switches in the OFF posi-
tion.
• Each time you push the button, the
airflow changes as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the climate
control system seat operating, the
seat cooler will turn OFF.
• The climate control system seat
defaults to the OFF position when-
ever the engine start/ stop button is
turned on.
• With the climate control system
seat ON to cool or warm the rear
seats, the system turns off or on
automatically depending on the
seat temperature.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. The
occupants must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too
warm and to turn the seat
warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used
for long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must
exercise extreme care for the
following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
OVI033021K
OVI033022K
■ Type A
■ Type B
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
Safety features of your vehicle
263
CAUTION
• The climate control system
seat is a supplementary cool-
ing and warming system. Use
the climate control seat when
the climate control system is
on. Using the climate control
seat for prolonged periods of
time with the climate control
system off could cause the cli-
mate control seat perform-
ance to be reduced.
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the sur-
face of the front seats and
seatbacks, or the air vent
holes may be blocked and pre-
vented from working properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspapers
under the seats. The air vent
may not work properly as the
air intake can be blocked.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the climate control
system seat.
• When the air vent does not
operate, restart the vehicle. If
there is no change, we recom-
mend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
327
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
• For maximum restraint sys-
tem protection, the seat belts
must always be used whenev-
er the car is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he/she must
be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or
the pelvis, chest and shoulders,
as applicable; wearing the lap
section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted
as firmly as possible, consis-
tent with comfort, to provide the
protection for which they have
been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce
the protection afforded to the
wearer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can
cause serious injuries in a
crash. The shoulder belt
should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never wear a seat belt over
fragile objects. If there is a
sudden stop or impact, the
seat belt can damage it.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat
belts. A twisted belt can't do
its job as well. In a collision, it
could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is
straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the
belt webbing or hardware. If
the belt webbing or hardware
is damaged, replace it.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing
with polishes, oils and chemi-
cals, and particularly battery
acid. Cleaning may safely be
carried out using mild soap and
water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or dam-
aged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact
even if damage to the assembly
is not obvious. Belts should not
be worn with straps twisted.
Each belt assembly must only
be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around
a child being carried on the
occupant's lap.
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt,
be careful not to latch the seat
belt in buckles of other seat. It's
very dangerous and you may
not be protected by the seat
belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt
and do not fasten and unfas-
ten the seat belt repeatedly
while driving. This could
result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property
damage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt
does not pass over objects that
are hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle. The seat belt may
not be fastened securely.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
Seat belt warning light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light will blink for
approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the engine start/stop button
ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
after the engine start/stop button is
ON, the seat belt warning light blinks
again for approximately 6 seconds.
Seat belt warning chime
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the engine start/stop button is
turned ON, the seat belt warning
chime will sound for approximately 6
seconds. At this time, if the seat belt
is fastened, the chime will stop at
once.
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
1GQA2083
B180A01NF-1
Safety features of your vehicle
303
✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
Height adjustment (front seat)
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of 4 posi-
tions for maximum comfort and safe-
ty.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt
anchor is locked into position
at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious
injuries in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts
after an accident could leave
you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protec-
tion in the event of another
collision leading to personal
injury or death. Replace your
seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
OBH038022
Front seat
331
Safety features of your vehicle
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used. (if equipped)
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) in the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt
portion as low as possible and
snugly across your hips, not on
your waist. If the lap belt is locat-
ed too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision. Both
arms should not be under or
over the belt. Rather, one should
be over and the other under, as
shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under
the arm nearest the door.
B210A01NF-1OVI033090
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Lap belt (if equipped)
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten a 2-point static type belt,
insert the metal tab (1) into the lock-
ing buckle (2). There will be an audi-
ble "click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. Check to make sure the belt
is properly locked and that the belt is
not twisted.
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the
length must be adjusted manually so
it fits snugly around your body. Fasten
the belt and pull on the loose end to
tighten. The belt should be placed as
low as possible on your hips, not on
your waist. If the belt is too high, it
could increase the possibility of your
being injured in an accident.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
OVI039066
OVI039064
OHM039105N
B220B01NF/H
Too high
Shorten
Correct
Lengthen
Shorten
333
Safety features of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
When you want to release the seat
belt, press the button (1) in the lock-
ing buckle.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts. The purpose of the pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
seat belts fit tightly against the occu-
pant's body in certain frontal colli-
sions. The pre-tensioner seat belts
may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the pre-
tensioner will release some of the
pressure on the affected seat belt. (if
equipped)
B210A02NF-1
WARNING
The center lap belt latching
mechanism is different from
those for the rear seat shoulder
belts. When fastening the rear
seat shoulder belts or the cen-
ter lap belt, make sure they are
inserted into the correct buck-
les to obtain maximum protec-
tion from the seat belt system
and assure proper operation.
OED030300
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or
twisted and always sit properly
on your seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's pre-tensioner seat belts
may be activated in certain frontal
collisions.
The pre-tensioners will not be acti-
vated if the seat belts are not being
worn at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for pro-
longed periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tension-
er seat belts were activated.
OBH038100
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit
from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn
correctly and adjusted to the
proper position. Please read
and follow all of the important
information and precautions
about your vehicle’s occupant
safety features – including
seat belts and air bags – that
are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts
properly.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch has been turned to
the ON position, and then it should
turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is
not working properly, this warn-
ing light will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the
SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is
turned to ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed
to operate only one time. After
activation, pre-tensioner seat
belts must be replaced. All
seat belts, of any type, should
always be replaced after they
have been worn during a colli-
sion.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-
tensioner seat belt assem-
blies, and failure to heed the
warnings not to strike, modify,
inspect, replace, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inad-
vertent activation and serious
injury.
• Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded,
we recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of
the vehicle may damage the pre-
tensioner seat belt system.
Therefore, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB)
(if equipped)
The purpose of the pre-safe seat belt
is to prevent passengers from getting
hurt by tightening the seat belt right
before a collision or dangerous
maneuver.
The pre-safe seat belt warning will
turn on if there is a problem with your
pre-safe seat belt.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you press the engine
start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illumination
for approximately 3 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
In order to maximize the safety of the
passenger, the pre-safe seat belt
system operates as below
• The seat belt is tightened when:
- The vehicle senses a collision
- Emergency braking situation
occurs
- Losing control of the vehicle
- The passenger leans to one side
• The seat belt vibrates when:
- The vehicle senses a object too
near the vehicle
- The Lane Departure Warning
System (if equipped) detects the
vehicle has moved out of its lane
Other functions are tightening a loose
seat belt after vehicle speed is over
40 km/h (25 mph) and winding a
loose seat belt after unfastening the
seat belt.
OVI039069
OVIEDR2900
CAUTION
The pre-safe seat belt activates
only when the passenger is
wearing his/her seat belt.
CAUTION
Do not be surprised when the
seat belt vibrates. It's not a mal-
function but a warning for your
safety.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use
of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the Safety
Standards of your country. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certify-
ing that it meets Safety Standards of
your country. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle
must wear their seat belts at all
times. Seat belts and child
restraints reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries for all
occupants in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. Without a
seat belt, occupants could be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehi-
cle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant seating contained in
this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle
needs to be properly restrained
at all times, including infants
and children. Never hold a child
in your arms or lap when riding
in a vehicle. The violent forces
created during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the inte-
rior. Always use a child restraint
appropriate for your child's
height and weight.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occu-
py the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion
should be fastened and snugged on
the hips and as low as possible. Check
periodically if belt fits. A child's squirm-
ing could put the belt out of position.
Children are given the most safety in
the event of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over
age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be placed
in the rearmost position. Children age
12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE on the hips, not a cross
the abdomen.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Shoulder
belts on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to
be in contact with a child’s
neck or face while the vehicle
is in motion.
• If seat belts are not properly
worn and adjusted on chil-
dren, there is a risk of death or
serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the
safety belt over the area of the
abdomen where the fetus is
located or above the abdomen
where the belt could crush the
fetus during an impact.
339
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper pro-
tection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. We recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
The protection of your restraint
system (seat belts and air bags)
is greatly reduced by reclining
your seat. Seat belts must be
snug against your hips and
chest to work properly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will
slide under the lap belt causing
serious internal injuries or the
occupant's neck could strike
the shoulder belt. Drivers and
passengers should always sit
well back in their seats, proper-
ly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
Safety features of your vehicle
403
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children not in a child restraint
should use one of the seat belts pro-
vided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap
belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether
anchor and/or ISOFIX anchors (if
equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car seat and seat
belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must
be placed in the rear seat.
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. Should an accident
occur and cause the passen-
ger-side air bag to deploy, it
could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat. Thus only
use a child restraint in the
rear seat of your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A seat belt or child restraint
system can become very hot
if it is left in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day, even if the
outside temperature does not
feel hot. Be sure to check the
seat cover and buckles before
placing a child there.
• When the child restraint sys-
tem is not in use, store it in
the luggage area or fasten it
with a seat belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in the
case of a sudden stop or an
accident.
• Children may be seriously
injured or killed by an inflating
air bag. All children, even
those too large for child
restraints, must ride in the
rear seat.
341
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear
seat. A child riding in the
front passenger seat can be
forcefully struck by an inflat-
ing air bag resulting in seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er’s instructions for installa-
tion and use of the child
restraint.
• Always make sure the child
seat is secured properly in the
vehicle and your child is
securely restrained in the
child seat.
• Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a
vehicle.The violent forces cre-
ated during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the
vehicle’s interior.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Always properly position and
secure children in the rear
seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-
up or kneel on the seat or
floor of a moving vehicle.
During a collision or sudden
stop, the child can be violent-
ly thrown against the vehicle’s
interior, resulting in serious
injury.
• Never use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
security in an accident.
• Seat belts can become very
hot, especially when the vehi-
cle is parked in direct sun-
light. Always check seat belt
buckles before fastening them
over a child.
• After an accident, we recom-
mend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never put a seat belt over
yourself and a child. During a
crash, the belt could press
deep into the child causing
serious internal injuries.
• Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle – not even
for a short time. The car can
heat up very quickly, resulting
in serious injuries to children
inside. Even very young chil-
dren may inadvertently cause
the vehicle to move, entangle
themselves in the windows, or
lock themselves or others
inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or
any two persons, to use the
same seat belt.
• Children often squirm and
reposition themselves
improperly. Never let a child
ride with the shoulder belt
under their arm or behind
their back.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
CRS09
OVI033033
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING
Do not operate the rear power
seat (if equipped) while the
child seat is installed.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that
an inflating passenger-side air
bag could impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint and kill the
child.
(Continued)
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint sys-
tem because of the driver's
seat, install the child restraint
system in the rear right seat.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously
injured or killed in a collision
if the child restraint is not
properly anchored to the car
and the child is not properly
restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read
the instructions supplied by
the child restraint system
manufacturer.
(Continued)
343
Safety features of your vehicle
Installing a child restraint system
by lap belt (on the center rear
seat) (if equipped)
To install a child restraint system on
the center rear seats, do the follow-
ing:
1. Place the child restraint system on
the center rear seat.
2. Extend the latch plate tongue of
the lap belt.
3. Route the lap belt through the
restraint according to the seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the
lap belt for a snug hold on the child
restraint by pulling on the loose
end of the belt. After installation of
the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure
the child restraint system is
securely installed.
1GHA2260/H
(Continued)
• If the seat belt does not oper-
ate as described in this sec-
tion, we recommend that the
system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint systems and
the instructions provided with
the child restraint system
could increase the chance
and/or severity of injury in an
accident.
• If the vehicle headrest pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat (as described in the
child seat system manual), the
headrest of the respective
seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
Installing a child restraint system
by lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the
seat belt to take up any slack. After
installation of the child restraint
system, try to move it in all direc-
tions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull
more webbing toward the retractor.
When you unbuckle the seat belt and
allow it to retract, the retractor will
automatically revert back to its nor-
mal seated passenger emergency
locking usage condition.
OEN036101 OEN036104
E2MS103005
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
Seating position
Age group
0 : Up to 10 kg
XUX
(0 - 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
XUX
(0 - 2 years)
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
X
UX
(9 months - 4 years)
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
XUX
(4 - 12 years)
Front
passenger
Rear
outboard
Rear
center
Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt
- For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate
for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following
table.
OVI039034
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass
group
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
Safety features of your vehicle
463
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rest, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
OVI033035
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break, causing serious
injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the
child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car and the
child is not properly restrained
in the child restraint. Always fol-
low the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions for installation
and use.
WARNING - Child
restraint check
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or
serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages
are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used
for adult seat belts or har-
nesses or for attaching other
items or equipment to the
vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached some-
where other than the correct
tether anchor.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of
fitting child seats that eliminates the
need to use the standard adult seat
belt to secure the seat in the vehicle.
This enables a much more secure
and positive location with the added
benefit of easier and quicker installa-
tion.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed
if it has vehicle-specific approval in
accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R44.
There is a child restraint symbol
located on the lower portion of each
side of the rear seatbacks. These
symbols indicate the position of the
lower anchors for child restraints so
equipped.
On each side of the rear seat,
between the cushion and backrest,
are located a pair of ISOFIX anchor-
age points together with a top tether
mounting on the shelf behind the
rear seats. During the installation,
the seat has to be engaged at the
anchorage-points in a way you can
hear it clicking (check by pulling!)
and has to be fixed with the Top
Tether-belt on the belonging point on
the shelf behind rear seats.
The installing and the use of a child-
seat has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to
the ISOFIX-seat.
OVI039060
OVI033036
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat
fully rearward against the seat-
back with the seatback in a ver-
tical position, not reclined.
Safety features of your vehicle
483
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat
to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the
child restraint seat latch into the
ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audi-
ble “click” sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the child restraint hook holder and
tighten to secure the seat. (Refer
to the previous page.)
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a
child restraint system in the
rear seat, all unused vehicle
rear seat belt metal latch
plates or tabs must be latched
securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent
the child from reaching and
taking hold of unretracted
seat belts. Unlatched metal
latch plates or tabs may allow
the child to reach the unre-
tracted seat belts which may
result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around
the lower anchors. Also make
sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the lower anchors.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt
webbing to get scratched or
pinched by the ISOFIX-seat
latch and ISOFIX anchor during
the installation.
(Continued)
Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to
attach a child restraint seat in
the middle of the rear seat to
the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash,
the child restraint seat ISOFIX
attachments may not be strong
enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the
center of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child
restraint lower anchorage
point. The improper increased
load may cause the anchorage
points or tether anchor to
break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-
compatible child restraint seat
only to the appropriate loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation
and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the
child restraint.
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear
seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors
are only provided for the left
and right outboard rear seating
positions.
(Continued)
349
Safety features of your vehicle
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Center
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are
those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
* ISO/R3 is able to be set up only at the foremost position of the passenger seat.
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
Safety features of your vehicle
503
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Driver’s knee air bag
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OVI033037
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the safety belts
provided in order to minimize
the risk and severity of injury in
the event of a collision or
rollover.
• SRS and pre-tensioners contain
explosive chemicals.
If scraping a vehicle without
removing SRS and pre-tension-
ers from a vehicle, it may cause
fire. Before scraping a vehicle,
we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Keep the SRS parts and wirings
away from water or any liquid. If
the SRS components are inop-
erative due to exposure to water
or liquids, it may cause fire or
severe injury.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
engine start/stop button is turned
to the ON or START position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of a serious frontal collision
or side collision in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determin-
ing factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of the extremely short time in which
a collision occurs and the need to
inflate the air bag between the
occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal
injury or death caused by
deploying air bags in a colli-
sion, the driver should sit as
far back from the steering
wheel air bag as possible (at
least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passengers
should always move their
seats as far back as possible
and sit back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air
bag expansion force if they are
not in a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or
bodily abrasions, injuries
from broken glasses or burns.
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
with both the seat belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your
doors and/or windows as soon as
possible after impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to the smoke
and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are
non-toxic, they may cause irritation
to the skin (eyes, nose and throat,
etc). If this is the case, wash and
rinse with cold water immediately
and consult a doctor if the symptom
persists.
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the
air bag related parts in the
steering wheel and/or instru-
ment panel and/or in both sides
of the roof rails above the front
and rear doors are very hot. To
prevent injury, do not touch the
air bag storage area’s internal
components immediately after
an air bag has inflated.
OYDESA2042
OLM034310
■ Type A
■ Type B
353
Safety features of your vehicle
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the warning light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the engine
start/stop button is in ON position.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air
bag in front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat. If
the front passenger air bag
inflates, it can cause serious
or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats of a
vehicle equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags, be
sure to install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain
air bags could cause serious
injury or death to an infant or
child.
W7-147
Safety features of your vehicle
543
SRS components and func-
tions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. Driver’s knee air bag module
11. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors.
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the engine
start/stop button is ON to determine
if a crash impact is severe enough to
require air bag deployment or pre-
tensioner seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light " "
on the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for about 6 seconds after the
engine start/stop button is turned to
the ON position, after which the SRS
air bag warning light " " should go
out.
OVI039100L
WARNING
If any of the following condi-
tions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the SRS. We rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The light does not turn on
briefly when you turn the
engine start/stop button to the
ON position.
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately 6
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine start/stop button is in
ON position.
355
Safety features of your vehicle
The front air bag modules are locat-
ed in the center of the steering
wheel, in the front passenger's panel
above the glove box and/or in the dri-
ver’s side knee bolster. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
OHM039102N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
OHM039103N OHM039104N
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
Safety features of your vehicle
563
WARNING
• Do not install or place any
accessories (drink holder,
cassette holder, sticker, etc.)
on the front passenger's
panel above the glove box in a
vehicle with a passenger's air
bag. Such objects may
become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When installing a container of
liquid air freshener inside the
vehicle, do not place it near
the instrument cluster nor on
the instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous
projectile and cause injury if
the passenger's air bag
inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there
may be a loud noise followed
by a fine dust released in the
vehicle. These conditions are
normal and are not hazardous
- the air bags are packed in this
fine powder. The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment
may cause skin or eye irrita-
tion as well as aggravate asth-
ma for some persons. Always
wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag)
System and the lap/shoulder belts at
both the driver and passenger seat-
ing positions.
The indications of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and/or on the
cover of the driver's side knee bolster
located below the steering wheel and
the passenger's side front panel pad
above the glove box.
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only
when the engine start/stop
button is in the ON position. If
the SRS " " warning light
does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illu-
minating for about 6 seconds
when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driv-
ing, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, we
recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or
disconnect a battery terminal,
turn the engine start/stop but-
ton to the OFF position. Never
remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the
engine start/stop button is in
the ON position. Failure to
heed this warning will cause
the SRS “ ” warning light to
illuminate.
OVI033038
OVI033039
Driver’s knee air bag
Driver’s front air bag
Safety features of your vehicle
583
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel , in the
knee bolster below the steering
wheel column and the passenger's
side front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's seat position, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors (if
equipped) determine if the driver and
front passenger's seat belts are fas-
tened. These sensors provide the
ability to control the SRS deployment
based on whether or not the seat
belts are fastened, and how severe
the impact is.
OVI033041
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every
time, everyone! Air bags inflate
with considerable force and in
the blink of an eye. Seat belts
help keep occupants in proper
position to obtain maximum
benefit from the air bag. Even
with air bags, improperly belted
and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air
bag inflates. Always follow the
precautions about seat belts, air
bags and occupant safety con-
tained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries and receive the
maximum safety benefit from
your restraint system:
• Never place a child in any
child or booster seat in the
front seat.
(Continued)
359
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, driver’s side
knee bolster, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags
to deploy.
• Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment
of the air bags or by rendering
the SRS inoperative.
• If the SRS air bag warning
light “ ”remains illuminat-
ed while the vehicle is being
driven, we recommend that
the system be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• ABC – Always Buckle
Children in the back seat. It is
the safest place for children of
any age to ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improp-
erly positioned.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air
bags, while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
• You and your passengers
should never sit or lean
unnecessarily close to the air
bags. Improperly positioned
drivers and passengers can
be severely injured by inflat-
ing air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in
an upright position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used
once - we recommend that the
system be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe
and when the impact angle is
less than 30° from the forward
longitudinal axis of the vehi-
cle. Additionally, the air bags
will only deploy once. Seat
belts must be worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended
to deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes
below the deployment thresh-
old.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front
seat. The infant or child could
be severely injured or killed by
an air bag deployment in case
of an accident.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
603
Side impact air bag
(Continued)
• Children age 12 and under
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he or she
must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
• For maximum safety protec-
tion in all types of crashes, all
occupants including the driv-
er should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an
air bag is also provided at
their seating position to mini-
mize the risk of severe injury
or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean
unnecessarily close to the air
bag while the vehicle is in
motion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
or fatal injury in a crash. All
occupants should sit upright
with the seat back in an
upright position, centered on
the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor until the vehicle is
parked and the engine
start/stop button is in the OFF
position.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an
occupant is out of position
because of not wearing a seat
belt, the air bag may forcefully
contact the occupant causing
serious or fatal injuries.
OVI033042
OVI033043
OVI039073L
Front
Rear
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front and out-
board rear seat. The purpose of the
air bag is to provide the vehicle's
driver and/or the front and outboard
rear passengers with additional pro-
tection than that offered by the seat
belt alone.
• The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy during certain
side-impact collisions, depending
on the crash severity, angle, speed
and point of impact.
• The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver’s and
the passengers seat belt sys-
tems and is not a substitute for
them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.The air
bags deploy only in certain
side impact conditions severe
enough to cause significant
injury to the vehicle occupants.
• For best protection from the
side impact air bag system and
to avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front and all rear (if
equipped) seat occupants
should sit in an upright posi-
tion with the seat belt properly
fastened. The driver's hands
should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
positions.The passenger’ arms
and hands should be placed on
their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could
reduce or prevent the effective-
ness of the system.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side
impact air bag.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between
the door and the seat. Such
objects may become danger-
ous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal
injury, avoid impact to the side
impact sensor when the igni-
tion switch is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occu-
pants in certain side impact colli-
sions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact. The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
situations, collisions from the front or
rear of the vehicle or in most rollover
situations.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain
air bags to provide the best
protection, front seat occu-
pants and outboard rear occu-
pants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belts
properly fastened. Importantly,
children should sit in a proper
child restraint system in the
rear seat.
(Continued)
OVI033084
OVI039074L
(Continued)
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats, they
must be seated in the proper
child restraint system. Make
sure to position the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and secure the child restraint
system in a locked position.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and pas-
sengers when they are seated
on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system.We recommend
that the system be serviced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle
occupants in an accident.
363
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
OVI033044/OVI033045/OVI033046/OVI039047/OVI039048
1
2
3 4
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (front)
(4) Side impact sensor (rear)
Safety features of your vehicle
643
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OVI039049
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sen-
sor installation angles are
changed due to the deforma-
tion of the front bumper, body
or B and C pillars where side
collision sensors are
installed. We recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been
designed to absorb impact
and deploy the air bag(s) in
certain collisions. Installing
aftermarket bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-
genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicles collision
and air bag deployment per-
formance.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should, causing severe
injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
We recommend that the sys-
tem be serviced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
365
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate only in frontal col-
lisions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient impact.
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate only in side
impact collisions, but they may inflate
in other collisions if the side impact
sensors detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
OVI039051
OVI033050N
OVI039075L
Safety features of your vehicle
663
• Frontal air bags are not designed
to inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this
case, inflated air bags would not be
able to provide any additional ben-
efit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
However, side impact and curtain
air bags may inflate depending on
the intensity, vehicle speed and
angles of impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
OBH038060OVI033053OVI039052
367
Safety features of your vehicle
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover
accidents because air bag deploy-
ment would not provide protection
to the occupants.
However, side impact and curtain
air bags may inflate when the vehi-
cle is rolled over by a side impact
collision, if the vehicle is equipped
with side impact air bags and cur-
tain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
OVI039054 OBH038062 OVI039055
Safety features of your vehicle
683
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you
can safely service by yourself. If the
SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate when you turn the ignition
ON, or if it continuously remains on,
we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS sys-
tem may result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure,
can adversely affect SRS per-
formance and lead to possible
injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad
covers, use only a soft, dry
cloth or one which has been
moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag
covers and proper deploy-
ment of the system.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm
if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they
must be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other
components of the SRS sys-
tem. Doing so could result in
injury, due to accidental infla-
tion of the air bags or by ren-
dering the SRS inoperative.
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or
if the vehicle must be
scrapped, certain safety pre-
cautions must be observed.
An authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er knows these precautions
and can give you the neces-
sary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and
procedures could increase
the risk of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and
has soaked carpeting or water
on the flooring, you shouldn't
try to start the engine; have
the car towed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
369
Safety features of your vehicle
Additional safety precautions
• All occupants should sit upright, fully
back in their seats with their seat
belts on and their feet on the floor.
• Passengers should not move out
of or change seats while the vehi-
cle is moving. A passenger who is
not wearing a seat belt during a
crash or emergency stop can be
thrown against the inside of the vehi-
cle, against other occupants, or out
of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more
than one person uses the same seat
belt, they could be seriously injured
or killed in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on
seat belts. Devices claiming to
improve occupant comfort or reposi-
tion the seat belt can reduce the pro-
tection provided by the seat belt and
increase the chance of serious
injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place
hard or sharp objects between
themselves and the air bags.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on
your lap or in your mouth can result
in injuries if an air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the
air bag covers. All occupants
should sit upright, fully back in their
seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor. If occupants
are too close to the air bag covers,
they could be injured if the air bags
inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on
or near the air bag covers. Any
object attached to or placed on the
front or side air bag covers could
interfere with the proper operation of
the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the
supplemental restraint system sens-
ing components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the
front seats. Placing items under
the front seats could interfere with
the operation of the supplemental
restraint system sensing compo-
nents and wiring harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. The infant or child could
be seriously injured or killed in the
event of a crash. All infants and chil-
dren should be properly restrained
in appropriate child safety seats or
seat belts in the rear seat.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can cause occupants
to be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle resulting in
serious injury or death.
• Always sit upright with the
seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat
cushion with your seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and your feet on the floor.
Safety features of your vehicle
703
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the oper-
ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
tem.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels are attached
to alert the driver and passengers of
potential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warn-
ings focus on the risk to children, we
also want you to be aware of the
risks which adults are exposed to.
Those have been described in previ-
ous pages.
✽
NOTICE
• Never remove the AIR BAG
WARNING LABEL on sunvisor.
• If you remove the AIR BAG
WARNING LABEL, it causes
damage to the sunvisor.
OVI033057L
Features of your vehicle
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Buttons on the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Restrictions in handling keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• From outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Power door latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• From inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Non-powered trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Power trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Emergency fuel filler lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Tilt/Telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Trip computer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• ASCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• Information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
Head up display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Parking guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Around view monitoring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Headlamp escort function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Headlamp leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Headlamp washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Trunk room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Door courtesy lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Puddle lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-148
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Rear console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Cool and warm box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
4
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Rear vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Bag hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• Rear curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Multimedia system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Aux, USB and iPod
®
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
4
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the
key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you lose your keys, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Remove the key code tag and store it
in a safe place. Also, record the key
code number and keep it in a safe
and handy place, but not in the vehi-
cle.
Smart key function
With the smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door and trunk and even
start the engine.
SMART KEY
OHG040010L
■ Conventional smart key
OVI043001
■ Card type smart key
WARNING
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the smart key is
dangerous even if the key is not
in the engine start/stop button is
in the ACC or ON position.
Children copy adults and they
could press the engine start/
stop button. The smart key
would enable children to operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in seri-
ous bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren, when the Engine is run-
ning.
45
Features of your vehicle
To remove the mechanical key
Conventional smart key
• To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button (1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it
until a click sound is heard.
Card type smart key
• To remove the mechanical key,
press and hold the release lever (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
• To reinstall the mechanical key,
press and hold the release lever (1)
and put the key into the hole and
push it until a click sound is heard.
Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will
blink once (the engine hood and
trunk must be closed). Also, the
outside rearview mirror will auto-
matically fold.
OHG040004L
■ Conventional smart key
OVI043005
■ Card type smart key
OVI043003
Features of your vehicle
64
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the trunk is
opened.
Unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Put your hand into the outside
door handle.
3. All doors will unlock and the haz-
ard warning lights will blink twice.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will automatically unfold.
✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the front outside door handle,
other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking all doors, the
doors will lock automatically
unless a door is opened within 30
seconds.
OVI049005
47
Features of your vehicle
Trunk unlocking
Power trunk
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the trunk handle switch.
3. The trunk will unlock and open.
Non-powered trunk
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the trunk handle switch.
3. The trunk will unlock.
✽
NOTICE
• Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock auto-
matically.
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the trunk handle.
Buttons on the smart key
Lock (1)
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine hood and trunk
must be closed).
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will automatically fold.
✽
NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink twice to indicate that all
doors are unlocked.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will automatically unfold.
✽
NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock automatically unless a door
is opened within 30 seconds.
Trunk unlock (3)
Non-powered trunk
1. Press the trunk unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate that the trunk is
unlocked.
OHG040007L
Features of your vehicle
84
✽
NOTICE
• After unlocking the trunk, the
trunk will lock automatically unless
it is opened within 30 seconds.
• Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock auto-
matically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on
the button to inform you that you
must press and hold the button.
Power trunk
1. Press the trunk unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the trunk is
unlocked and opened.
✽
NOTICE
• Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock auto-
matically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on
the button to inform you that you
must press and hold the button.
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot
and valet attendants, the following pro-
cedures will ensure that your vehicle’s
trunk and glove box compartment can
not be opened in your absence.
To activate the trunk lock system so
that the trunk can only be opened
with the mechanical key, perform the
following:
1. Press and hold the release button
and remove the mechanical key
from the smart key.
2. Unlock the glove box by using the
mechanical key then open it.
3. Set the trunk lid control button to
OFF position (unpressed).
4. Close and lock the glove box using
the mechanical key.
When leaving your keys with a park-
ing lot attendant or valet, perform
steps 1 to 4 above, remove the
mechanical key from the smart key
and leave the smart key with the
attendant. In this manner the smart
key can only be used to start the
engine and operate door locks.
OVI043006
49
Features of your vehicle
Lock release
To release the trunk lock feature,
open the glove box with the mechan-
ical key and set the trunk lid control
button to ON position (pressed). In
this position the trunk will open with
the trunk lid button or smart key.
Smart key precautions
✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to
lose your smart key, you will not
be able to start the engine. Tow the
vehicle, if necessary, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 3 smart keys
including card type (if equipped)
can be registered to a single vehi-
cle. If you lose a smart key, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two-way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart
key, we recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proxim-
ity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is
active such as making call, receiv-
ing calls, text messaging, and/or
sending/receiving emails. Avoid
placing the smart key and your
cell phone or smart phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
Features of your vehicle
104
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle may be equipped with
an electronic engine immobilizer sys-
tem to reduce the risk of unautho-
rized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
key and electronic devices inside the
vehicle.
Whenever the engine start/stop but-
ton is changed to the ON position,
the immobilizer system checks and
verifies if the key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will
start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system
Change the engine start/stop button
to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button
to the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the key-
less entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.
411
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunc-
tion.
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the
battery, we recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The circuit inside the smart key can
have a problem if exposed to mois-
ture or static electricity.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from
normally transmitting.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trou-
ble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois-
ture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction. We rec-
ommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
124
Conventional smart key
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
Card type smart key
1. Pull out the battery and battery
cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2412). Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Install the battery cover and battery.
✽
NOTICE
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• Circuits inside the smart key may
develop problems when dropped,
exposed to moisture or static elec-
tricity.
• If you suspect that your smart key
might have sustained some dam-
age, or you feel your smart key is
not working correctly, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
OHG040009
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
OVI043004
413
Features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the car. This system is operated
in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and trunk lid are
closed and latched.
3.• Lock the doors by pressing the but-
ton of the outside door handle with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
operate once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the doors
won't lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds. Close the door and
try again to lock the doors.
If trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warn-
ing lights won't operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After this, if the
trunk lid and engine hood are
closed, the hazard warning lights
will blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the
lock button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will operate once to indicate that
the system is armed.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning
lights won't operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, trunk lid and engine hood
are closed, the hazard warning
lights will blink once.
• Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehi-
cle. If the system is armed while
a passenger(s) remains in the
vehicle, the alarm may be acti-
vated when the remaining pas-
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If
any door, trunk lid or engine
hood is opened within 30 sec-
onds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
144
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A door is opened without using the
smart key.
• The trunk is opened without using
the smart key.
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds. To turn
off the system, unlock the doors with
the smart key.
Opening the trunk with the
alarm armed (if equipped)
When the alarm is armed, the alarm
will not sound if the trunk lid is
opened with the smart key.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatical-
ly and the system will be armed again.
Also, if any of the doors or hood is
opened while the trunk lid is opened
and the alarm armed, the alarm will
sound.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when
the doors are unlocked with the
smart key. The hazard warning lights
will blink twice to indicate that the
system is disarmed.
After unlocking the doors, if any door
(or trunk) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starter motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, open the doors by
using the mechanical key and turn
the engine start/stop button to the
ON position. (except China)
• If you lose your keys, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
415
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and we
recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
164
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• To lock the doors, press the button
of the outside door handle while car-
rying the smart key with you or press
the lock button on the smart key.
• To unlock the doors, put your hand
into the outside door handle while
carrying the smart key or press the
unlock button on the smart key.
• If the smart key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Depress and hold the release but-
ton (1) and remove the mechanical
key (2). Insert the mechanical key
in to the key hole (3) and turn the
key toward the rear of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the front of the
vehicle to lock.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it
until a click sound is heard.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door
locks and door mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
DOOR LOCKS
OVI043008
OHG040004L
Unlock
Lock
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's
body and hands are not
trapped when closing the
door.
417
Features of your vehicle
Power door latch (if equipped)
If a door isn’t closed completely but
is closed to the first detent position,
the door will be close automatically.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in lock position, the button is
unlocked and door opens. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is opened.
OVI049008
Lock
Unlock
OVI043007
WARNING
If the door is open slightly, be
careful not to nip fingers in the
door.
CAUTION
Before closing the door, ensure
that all obstructions are removed.
WARNING - Door lock
malfunction
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the
vehicle, try one or more of the
following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock fea-
ture repeatedly (both electron-
ic and manual) while simulta-
neously pulling on the door
handle.
• Operate the other door locks
and handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use
the key to unlock the door
from outside.
Features of your vehicle
184
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central
door lock switch.
• When pressing the right portion (1)
for the driver or the left portion (3)
of the switch for the front passen-
ger, all vehicle doors will lock.
• When pressing the left portion (2)
for the driver or the right portion (4)
of the switch for the front passen-
ger, all vehicle doors will unlock.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (1) or (3) of the central door
lock switch is pressed.
OVI043009
■ Driver’s door
OVI049010L
■ Front passenger’s door
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows down.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
Furthermore, children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm,
possibly from someone gaining
entry to the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended
in your vehicle.
419
Features of your vehicle
Engine off door unlock system
All doors will automatically unlock
when the engine start/stop button is
turned to the ACC or OFF position.
Shift lever door lock/unlock system
• All doors will automatically lock
when the shift lever is moved out of
P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into P
(Park).
You can activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features in the
vehicle. Refer to "LCD display" in this
section.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock (1)
located on the rear edge of the
door to the lock ( ) position.
When the child safety lock is in the
lock position, the rear door will not
open even though the inner door
handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (2)
until the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked ( ).
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out
and be severely injured or
killed. To prevent children from
opening the rear doors from the
inside, the rear door safety
locks should be used whenever
children are in the vehicle.
OVI049011
Features of your vehicle
204
Non-powered trunk
Opening the trunk
• The trunk is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the smart key or
central door lock switch.
• To open the trunk only while all
doors are locked, press the trunk
unlock button on the smart key for
more than 1 second, press the but-
ton on the trunk handle with the
smart key in your possession, or
insert the mechanical key of the
smart key into the lock and turn it
clockwise.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk is locked auto-
matically.
• If the trunk is unlocked, it can be
opened by pulling the handle up.
• To open the trunk by using the
trunk lid release button, press the
button and pull up the trunk handle.
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
tions.
TRUNK
OVI043013
OVI043012
421
Features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
To close the trunk, lower the trunk lid,
then press down it until it locks. To be
sure the trunk lid is securely fas-
tened, always check by trying to pull
it up again.
Power trunk (if equipped)
The power trunk can be opened or
closed automatically with the smart
key, the power trunk main control
button, the open button, or the close
button on the trunk lid.
If you depress the power trunk main
control button, open button, or close
button while operating the power
trunk, you could stop operating the
power trunk.
If that happens, to operate the power
trunk again, push any button.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the trunk lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the trunk is
not closed prior to driving.
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are
near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the trunk.
WARNING
The trunk lid should be always
kept completely closed while
the vehicle is in motion. If it is
left open or ajar, poisonous
exhaust gases may enter the
vehicle and serious illness or
death may result.
CAUTION
For your safety, do not leave the
power trunk open for a long
time, it could also to prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain.
Features of your vehicle
224
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, the power
trunk may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
Power trunk main control button
Pressing the power trunk main con-
trol button opens the power trunk
automatically.
To close the power trunk, press the
power trunk main control button until
the power trunk is closed securely.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before operating the power
trunk. Wait until the trunk is
open fully and stopped before
loading or unloading cargo or
passengers from the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure the trunk is closed
firmly before driving. If the trunk
is open, you will draw danger-
ous exhaust fumes into your
vehicle which can cause seri-
ous injury or death to vehicle
occupants.
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
trunk manually. This may cause
damage to the power trunk. If it
is necessary that close or open
the power trunk manually when
the battery is discharged or dis-
connected, do not apply exces-
sive force.
OVI043013
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power trunk that could
result in injury to themselves or
others, or damage to the vehicle.
423
Features of your vehicle
Power trunk open button
Pressing the power trunk open button
opens the power trunk automatically.
To open the power trunk with all
doors closed and locked, press the
power trunk open button while carry-
ing the smart key.
Power trunk close button
Pressing the power trunk close but-
ton while the power trunk is opened,
closes the power trunk automatically.
Power trunk lock button
Pressing the power trunk lock button
while carrying the smart key, closes
the power trunk automatically, locks
all doors, and arms the system.
The chime sound will operate if you
press the power trunk lock button
when:
- Any door is open.
- The engine start/stop button is not
in the OFF position.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
OVI043014 OVI043015 OVI043016
Features of your vehicle
244
Power trunk non-opening condi-
tions
The power trunk will not open or close
automatically, when the vehicle is
moving more than 3 km/h (1.8 mph).
✽
NOTICE
If there are obstacles such as snow
on the power trunk, it may not open
automatically. After remove the
obstacle, try to open it again.
✽
NOTICE
• The power trunk can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However the power trunk opera-
tion consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
do not operate it excessively e.g.:
more than approximately 10 times
repeatedly.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
trunk in the open position for a
long lime.
• Do not apply excessive force while
operating the power trunk. This
could cause damage to the power
trunk.
• Do not modify or repair any part of
the power trunk by yourself. We
recommend that the system be serv-
iced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power trunk.
This could cause the power trunk
to operate improperly.
Automatic stop and reversal
If, during power opening or closing, the
trunk is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the power trunk will detect
the resistance, and it will stop move-
ment or move to the full open position
to allow the object to be cleared.
However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the trunk is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and
reversal may not detect the resist-
ance and the closing operation will
continue. Also, if the power trunk is
forced by a strong impact, the auto-
matic stop and reversal may operate.
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power trunk that could
result in injury to themselves or
others, or damage to the vehicle.
OVI043017
425
Features of your vehicle
If the automatic stop and reversal
feature operates continuously more
than twice during one opening or
closing operation, the power trunk
may stop at that position. At this time,
close the trunk manually and operate
the trunk automatically again.
How to reset the power trunk
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse
has been replaced or disconnected,
for the power trunk to operate nor-
mally, reset the power trunk as fol-
low:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2. Close the trunk manually.
If the power trunk doesn't work prop-
erly after above procedure, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Trunk lid control button
• When the trunk lid control button is
ON(depressed), the power trunk
can be controlled with the power
trunk main control button, power
trunk open, close button, and the
smart key.
• When the trunk lid control button is
OFF (not depressed), the power
trunk can controlled with the
mechanical key of the smart key
only.
WARNING
• Never intentionally place any
object or part of your body in
the path of the power trunk to
make sure the automatic stop
operates.
• Make sure all faces, arms,
hands, body parts and any
other obstructions are safely
out of the way before operat-
ing the power trunk.
• Never place any object or part
of your body in the path of the
power trunk. This could result
in serious injury or cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before operating the power
trunk.
OVI043018
OFF ON
Features of your vehicle
264
✽
NOTICE
Close the trunk, and keep the trunk
lid control button in the OFF (not
depressed) position before washing
the vehicle in an automatic car
wash.
Emergency trunk safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency trunk safety release lever
located inside the trunk. When some-
one is inadvertently locked in the
trunk, the trunk can be opened by
moving the lever in the direction of the
arrow and pushing open the trunk.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with
the power trunk. Keep the trunk
lid control button in the OFF (not
depressed) position when not in
use. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional power
operation by a child.
WARNING
Even though the trunk lid con-
trol button is in the OFF (not
depressed) position, the trunk
will still be propelled upward by
mechanical force if the trunk is
manually opened more than 10
degrees beyond the fully closed
position. In addition, if the trunk
is manually closed to the sec-
ondary latch position, the trunk
will be electrically moved to the
fully latched position. Make
sure that face, arms, hands, and
other obstructions are safely
out of the way before operating
the trunk.
OVI043019
427
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency trunk safety
release lever in this vehicle
and how to open the trunk if
you are accidentally locked in
the trunk.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time.
The trunk is a very dangerous
location in the event of a
crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
Features of your vehicle
284
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch and curtain switch (if
equipped)
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch and curtain switch (if
equipped)
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OVI043021
429
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The engine start/stop button must be
in the ON position for power windows
to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the oper-
ation of passenger windows. The
power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
engine start/stop button turned to the
ACC or OFF position. However, if the
front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open position), your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch.
If you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OVI049021
Features of your vehicle
304
Auto up/down window
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the engine start/stop button
to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least 1 second.
Automatic reverse
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for all
windows are only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automat-
ic reverse feature will not operate if
the window is raised using the
halfway position on the power win-
dow switch.
OBH048200
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm (0.16
in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
431
Features of your vehicle
Rear door window curtains
(if equipped)
The rear door window curtain is use-
ful to shade off the sunlight. You can
fold or unfold it with the power win-
dow switch on the driver's door or the
rear door.
1. Close the window by pulling up the
switch.
2. To set up the curtain, pull up the
switch once more.
3. If you want to open the curtained
window, fold the curtain first by
pushing down the switch. Then
you can open the window by push-
ing the switch once again.
Resetting the rear door window cur-
tain
If the curtain is not operated correct-
ly, the curtain must be reset as fol-
lows:
1. Turn the engine start/stop button
to the ON position.
2. Close the curtain by pressing the
power window switch to the first
detent position and continue
pulling up the switch for at least 10
seconds.
If the curtain doesn't work properly
after above procedure, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
The rear door window curtain may
not operate normally, when the tem-
perature in the vehicle is lower than
-15 °C (5 °F).
CAUTION
• If the upward or downward
movement of the curtain is
blocked by an object or part of
the body, the curtain will
detect the resistance and will
stop movement and move
downward.
• Do not apply excessive force
while operating the curtain.
This could cause damage to
the curtain.
OVI049146L
OVI049147L
■ Driver’s door
■ Rear door
Features of your vehicle
324
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch. The indicator will
be illuminated.
When the power window lock switch
indicator is illuminated:
• The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
• The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
OVI043022
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the Engine is
running.
• NEVER leave any child unat-
tended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inad-
vertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
dow lock switch in the LOCK
position (depressed). Serious
injury can result from uninten-
tional window operation by
the child.
• Do not extend a face or arms
outside the window while
driving.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the power window system,
do not open or close two win-
dows or more at the same
time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door
and the individual door win-
dow switch in opposing direc-
tions at the same time. If this
is done, the window will stop
and cannot be opened or
closed.
433
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull up the sec-
ondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely
raise by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine com-
partment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
OVI043020
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the
P(Park) position, and setting the
parking brake.
OVI043023
WARNING
• Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present in
the hood opening may result
in property damage or severe
personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
Features of your vehicle
344
WARNING
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood raised. The view will
be blocked and the hood
could fall or get damaged.
435
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pressing
the fuel filler lid open button located
on the driver’s door.
✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Push the fuel filler lid opener but-
ton, then the fuel filler lid slowly
open (1).
3. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap (2) counterclockwise.
4. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks”. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OVI049024
OVI043025N
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
Features of your vehicle
364
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate poten-
tially dangerous static elec-
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling
dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines
carefully. Failure to follow these
guidelines may result in severe
personal injury, severe burns or
death by fire or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning at
the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the loca-
tion of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
(Continued)
437
Features of your vehicle
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually by
pulling the handle outward slightly.
(Continued)
• When refueling, always shut
the engine off. Sparks pro-
duced by electrical compo-
nents related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Once refueling is com-
plete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before start-
ing the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station
especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehi-
cle according to the "Fuel
requirements" suggested in
section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a gen-
uine HYUNDAI cap or the
equivalent specified for your
vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler
cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel system
or emission control system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exteri-
or surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the
paint.
• After refueling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely
to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
OVI049026
Features of your vehicle
384
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the engine
start/stop button is in the ON position.
✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After washing the car or after
there is rain, be sure to wipe off
any water that is on the sunroof
before operating it.
✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot slide when it is
in the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI049027
CAUTION
Do not continue to move the
sunroof control lever after the
sunroof is fully open, closed, or
tilt. Damage to the motor or sys-
tem components could occur.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
439
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
To open or close the sunroof (manu-
al slide feature), pull or push the sun-
roof control lever backward or for-
ward to the first detent position.
Pulling the control lever downward
also closes the sunroof.
To open or close the sunroof auto-
matically, pull or push the sunroof
control lever backward or forward to
the second detent position. The sun-
roof will slide all the way open or
closed. To stop the sunroof sliding at
any point, pull or push the sunroof
control lever momentarily in the oppo-
site direction of sunroof movement.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse direction,
and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
To open the sunroof (autotilt feature),
push the sunroof control lever
upward to the second detent. The
sunroof will tilt all the way open. To
stop the sunroof tilting at any point,
operate the control lever.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever downward until the sunroof
moves to the desired position.
OVI049030OVI049028 OVI049029
Features of your vehicle
404
Sunshade
The sunshade will automatically
open with the glass panel when the
glass panel moves. Close it manual-
ly if you want it closed.
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s
head, hands and body are not
trapped by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sun-
roof while driving.
• Make sure your hands and
face are safely out of the way
before closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
• While using sunroof for a long
time, a dust between sunroof
and roof panel can make a
noise. Open the sunroof and
regularly remove the dust
using clean cloth.
CAUTION
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
OVI049031
441
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the
followings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnect-
ed or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected.
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate.
1.Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position and close the sun-
roof completely.
2.Release the control lever.
3.Pull and hold the control lever
downward until the sunroof tilts
and slightly moves up and down.
Then, release the lever.
4.Pull and hold the control lever
downward until the sunroof is oper-
ated as follows;
TILT DOWN
→ SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
❈ For more detailed information, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the sunroof is not reset when
the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related
fuse is blown, the sunroof may
operate improperly.
Features of your vehicle
424
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat, outside rearview mirrors,
steering wheel position and HUD
(Head-Up Display) height with a sim-
ple button operation. By saving the
desired positions into the system
memory, different drivers can reposi-
tion the driver seat, outside rearview
mirrors, steering wheel and HUD
(Head-Up Display) height based
upon their driving preference. If the
battery is disconnected, the position
memory will be lost and the driving
positions should be restored in the
system.
✽
NOTICE
If the memory system does not oper-
ate normally, have the driver posi-
tion memory system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON.
2. Adjust the driver seat, outside
rearview mirrors, steering wheel
and HUD (Head-Up Display)
height to positions comfortable for
the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when the
memory has been successfully
stored.
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
OVI049032
443
Features of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON.
2. To recall the position in memory,
press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, and then the driver seat,
outside rearview mirrors, steering
wheel and HUD (Head-Up
Display) height will automatically
adjust to the stored positions.
Adjusting one of the control knobs for
the driver seat, outside rearview mir-
ror and steering wheel while the sys-
tem is recalling the stored positions
will cause the movement for that
component to stop and move in the
direction that the control knob is
moved. Other components will con-
tinue to the recalled position.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The steering wheel will move away
from the driver and the seat will
move rearward, when the engine
start/stop button is turned to the OFF
position.
The steering wheel will move toward
the driver and the seat will move for-
ward, when the engine start/stop but-
ton is turned to the ACC or ON posi-
tion.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling
adjustment memory while sitting
in the vehicle. Push the seat posi-
tion control knob to the desired
position immediately if the seat
moves too far in any direction.
Features of your vehicle
444
STEERING WHEEL
Power steering
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the
vehicle. If the engine is off or if the
power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic Hydraulic Power
Steering (EHPS)
EHPS uses an electromotor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. It senses
the vehicle speed and road condition.
If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it
will require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
If the power steering drive belt
breaks or if the power steering
pump malfunctions, the steering
effort will greatly increase.
✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below -10°C/14°F), the power steer-
ing may require increased effort
when the engine is first started. This
is caused by increased fluid viscosity
due to the cold weather and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing accelera-
tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm
then release or let the engine idle for
two or three minutes to warm up the
fluid.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or
left turn) for more than 5 sec-
onds with the engine running.
Holding the steering wheel for
more than 5 seconds in either
position may cause damage to
the power steering pump.
445
Features of your vehicle
Tilt/Telescopic steering
Tilt/Telescopic steering allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can also raise it to give
your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
Electric type
Adjust the steering wheel angle (2)
and position (3) with the switch (1).
Never adjust the position of the
steering wheel while driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the engine start/stop button in
the ON position, pressing the heated
steering wheel button warms the
steering wheel. The indicator on the
button is illuminated.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button is turned off.
Approximately 30 munities after the
heated steering wheel is turned on, it
will be turned off automatically.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving.
You may lose steering control
and cause severe personal
injury, death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
OVI043034
OVI043035
Features of your vehicle
464
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
OVI043036
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip for con-
venient to operate the steering
wheel. This causes damage to
the heated steering wheel sys-
tem.
447
Features of your vehicle
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass
1. On/Off button
2. Status Indicator
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window (if equipped)
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat which would interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident which
could cause death, serious
injury or property damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and do not install a wide mirror.
It could result in injury, during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag.
OVI049037L
Features of your vehicle
484
The electric rearview mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lights of the car behind you in night-
time or low light driving conditions.The
sensor mounted in the mirror senses
the light level around the vehicle, and
automatically controls the headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare
is automatically controlled by the sen-
sor mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into R (Reverse), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the on/off button (1) to turn the
automatic dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the on/off button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the button, then the
vehicle's directional heading will be
displayed. Pressing and releasing the
button again will turn off the display.
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
449
Features of your vehicle
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more
than 9 but less than 12 seconds.
When the compass memory is
cleared a "C" will appear in the display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at less
than 8km/h 2 times or until the com-
pass heading appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed
direction and opposite direction are
possible, and if the calibration is
completed, the compass heading
will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a com-
pass heading appears.
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and
variance zone number on the zone
map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 but less than 9 seconds.
The current zone number will
appear in the display.
B520C01JM
Europe
B520C03JM
Asia
B520C04JM
South America
B520C05JM
Africa
Features of your vehicle
504
3. Press the button until the new zone
number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button
in, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
4. Changing Mirror Angle setting
(if equipped):
Due to mirror positions being angled
towards the driver, the compass mir-
ror can also compensate for drivers
seated on the Left Hand side of the
vehicle (steering wheel on the LH
side of the vehicle) or Right Hand
side of the vehicle (steering wheel on
the RH side of the vehicle).
To adjust the Left Hand, “L” or Right
Hand, “R”, setting:
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 12 seconds.
2. Release then press the button to
toggle between “L” and “R”.
✽
NOTICE
This procedure also causes the com-
pass to be de-calibrated.
3. To re-calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 8km/h (5mph).
CAUTION
1.Do not install the ski rack,
antenna, etc. which are
attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet.They affect
the operation of the compass.
2.If the compass deviates from
the correct indication soon
after repeated adjustment, we
recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3.The compass may not indicate
the correct compass point in
tunnels or while driving up or
down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the
correct compass point when
the vehicle moves to an area
where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)
4.When cleaning the mirror, use
a paper towel or similar materi-
al dampened with glass clean-
er. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
451
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing
in a narrow street.
OVI043039
WARNING - Rearview
mirrors
• The outside rearview mirrors
are convex. Objects seen in
the mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
to release the frozen mecha-
nism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to
melt.
Features of your vehicle
524
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror, press the R or L
button (1) to select the right side mir-
ror or the left side mirror, then press a
corresponding point ( ) on the mir-
ror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the R or L
button again to prevent the inadver-
tent adjustment.
OVI043040
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control, and an acci-
dent which could cause death,
serious injury or property dam-
age.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
453
Features of your vehicle
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
When you shift the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position, the outside
rearview mirror(s) will move down-
ward to aid reverse parking.
According to the position of the out-
side rearview mirror switch (1), the
outside rearview mirror(s) will oper-
ate as follows:
Left or Right : When the L or R
switch is selected,
both outside rearview
mirrors will move
downward.
Neutral : When neither switch is
selected, the outside
rearview mirrors will not
operate.
✽
NOTICE
The outside rearview mirrors will
automatically revert to their original
positions under the following condi-
tions:
1. Engine start/stop button is turned
to the ACC or OFF position.
2. Shift lever is moved to any posi-
tion except R.
3. Remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is not selected.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric chromic mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the car behind you in
nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions. The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into R (Reverse), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle. If the ECM of
inside rearview mirror operates, the
function will be worked at the outside
rearview mirror simultaneously.
OVI043033
Features of your vehicle
544
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
press the button.
To unfold it, press the button again.
The engine start/stop button must be
in the ON position to fold or unfold
the outside rearview mirrors.
The electric folding outside rearview
mirror can be operated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds after the engine
start/stop button is turned to the ACC
or OFF position.
Also, the outside rearview mirror will
fold or unfold as follows:
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked with
the smart key.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the locked vehicle with
the smart key in your possession.
OVI043041
CAUTION
In case of the electric type of
outside rearview mirror, don’t
fold it by hand. It could cause
the failure of the motor.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
455
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Odometer
6. LCD display (including trip computer)
Instrument cluster theme (Type B)
• The instrument cluster theme is automati-
cally changed in accordance with the drive
mode (NORMAL, SPORT, SNOW).
❈ For more details of the drive mode, refer
to "Drive mode integrated control system"
in chapter 5.
• On the "User Settings Mode" of the LCD
display, you can activate or deactivate the
automatic change of the instrument cluster
theme.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD Display" in
this chapter.
OVIEDI3901/OVIEDI3902
■
Type A
❈ The actual instrument cluster in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration. For more
details, refer to the "Gauges" in this chap-
ter.
■
Type B
Features of your vehicle
564
Instrument cluster control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination can be adjusted by
pressing the illumination control but-
tons (“+” or “-”) when the Engine
Start/Stop button is ON or the tale
lights are turned on.
• The brightness has 20 levels : 1
(MIN) ~ 20 (MAX)
• If you hold the illumination control
button (“+” or “-”), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
OVI043051 OVIEDI3903
WARNING
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. This could
result in loss of control and lead
to an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
457
Features of your vehicle
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) button : Changing LCD modes
(right to left), or returning to pre-
vious position
(2) button : Changing LCD
modes (left to right)
(3) , button : Changing items
(upper or lower)
(4) OK button : selecting or resetting
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
(1) Haptic switch : changing LCD
modes or items
(2) OK button : selecting or resetting
(3) RETURN button : returning to
previous position
You can adjust the rotating effort of
the haptic switch on the "User Set-
tings Mode" of the LCD Display
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" to in this chapter.
OVI043410
■
Type A
OVI043411
■
Type B
Features of your vehicle
584
Gauges
Speedometer
✽
NOTICE
On the "User Settings Mode" of the
LCD display, you can set the font
size of the speedometer (Normal or
Large) (Type B).
The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles
per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
OVIDDI3956
■ Type A (km/h)
■ Type A (MPH)
OVIDDI2913
OVIEDI3904
■ Type B (km/h)
■ Type B (MPH)
OVIDDI2905
459
Features of your vehicle
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
Engine Start/Stop button is ON.
OVIDDI2904
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVIDDI2912
OVIDDI2906
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVIDDI2914
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
Features of your vehicle
604
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pres-
sure and could severely burn.
Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
OVIDDI2907
■ Type A
■ Type B
OVIDDI2915
461
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilo-
meters or miles.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F).
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-40°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
pressing the OFF button and AUTO
button on the front climate control
panel for 3 seconds simultaneously.
WARNING - Fuel Gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
OVIDDI2901 OVIDDI2902
Features of your vehicle
624
Automatic Transmission Shift
Indicator
This indicator displays which automat-
ic transmission shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
OVIDDI2903
463
Features of your vehicle
LCD Modes
LCD DISPLAY
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
❈ For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
ASCC/LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control (ASCC) and
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
❈ For more details, refer to “Advanced Smart Cruise Control (ASCC)” and
“Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)” in chapter 5.
A/V
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
Information
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages
related to the advanced smart cruise control system, pre-safe seat belt, and so on.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
or
Features of your vehicle
644
Trip Computer Mode
This mode displays driving informa-
tion like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on.
❈ For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
ASCC/LDWS Mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) and Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS).
❈ For more details, refer to "Advanced
Smart Cruise Control (ASCC)" and
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V Mode
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
OVIEDI3906 OVIDDI2923
OVIDDR2912/OVIDDR2919
ASCC
LDWS
465
Features of your vehicle
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
Information Mode
Service Interval
This mode shows the service interval
(mileage and days).
❈ For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 miles) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the Engine Start/Stop Button
to the ON position.
OVIDDI2924
OVIEDI3907
Features of your vehicle
664
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, "Service required"
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Activate the reset mode by press-
ing the OK button for more than 5
second, then press the OK button
again for more than 1 second
(Europe).
- Press the OK button for more than
1 second (Except Europe).
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
✽
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OVIEDI3909OVIEDI3908
467
Features of your vehicle
Warning Message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
information mode for about 10 sec-
onds.
- Malfunction of the pre-safe seat
belt, electronic control suspension,
or advanced smart cruise control
system
- Low washer fluid
Features of your vehicle
684
User Settings Mode
HUD Settings (if equipped)
Display Height
Adjust the height of the HUD image on
the windshield glass (Level 0 to 20).
Illumination
Adjust the intensity of the HUD illu-
mination (Level 0 to 20).
Font Color
Choose the font color of the HUD
(White, Orange, Green).
OVIEDI3911 OVIEDI3912 OVI043504
469
Features of your vehicle
Font Size
Choose the font size of the HUD
(Large, Medium, Small).
Contents Setting (if equipped)
Activate or deactivate each contents
of the HUD (TBT, SCC, LDWS, BSD).
❈ TBT : Turn By Turn
SCC : Advanced Smart Cruise
Control
LDWS : Lane Departure Warning
System
BSD : Blind Spot Detection
✽
NOTICE
If you select the Turn By Turn
(TBT) navigation information as
HUD contents, the Turn By Turn
(TBT) navigation information will
not be displayed on the LCD.
OVIEDI3914 OVIEDI3951E
Features of your vehicle
704
Items Explanation
Welcome Sound
• On: The welcome sound will operate when the instrument cluster is turned on.
• Off: The welcome sound function will be deactivated.
ECO Pedal
(Intelligent Accelerator Pedal)
(if equipped)
• On : The ECO function of the intelligent accelerator pedal will be activated.
• Off : The ECO function of the intelligent accelerator pedal will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Intelligent Accelerator Pedal” in chapter 5.
AVSM (if equipped)
• On: The AVSM system will be activated.
• Off: The AVSM system will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Advanced Vehicle Safety Management (AVSM) System” in chapter 5.
❈ AVSM: Advanced Vehicle Safety Management
LDWS Haptic (if equipped)
• On: The haptic function of the Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) will be activated.
• Off: The haptic function of the Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)” in chapter 5.
Traffic Information
(if equipped)
• On: The LCD display will show traffic information.
• Off: The LCD display will not show traffic information.
Speedometer Size
(if equipped)
• Choose the size of the number in the speedometer (Large or Normal).
Vehicle Settings
On this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.
Cluster Settings
471
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Driving Mode Theme
(if equipped)
• On : The instrument cluster theme is automatically changed in accordance with the drive mode
(NORMAL, SPORT, SNOW).
• Off : The automatic change function of the instrument cluster theme will be deactivated
ECO Driving
• On : The ECO driving mode will be activated.
• Off : The ECO driving mode will be deactivated.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
• Auto Reset: The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset: The average fuel economy will not reset automatically when refueling.
❈ For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Language (if equipped) • Choose the language of LCD display (English, French, Spanish).
Items Explanation
Auto Door Lock
• Off: The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
• Shift Lever: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted
from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Door Unlock
• Off: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Power Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Shift Lever: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
• Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked.
Door
Features of your vehicle
724
Lamp
Items Explanation
Head Lamp Delay
• On: The head lamp delay function will be activated.
• Off: The headlamp delay function will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Welcome Light
• On: The welcome light function will be activated.
• Off: The welcome light function will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Welcome System” in this chapter.
One Touch Turn Lamp
• Off: The one touch turn lamp function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashing : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
473
Features of your vehicle
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• Off: The seat easy access function will be deactivated.
• Normal/Enhanced:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward by 5 cm
(Normal) or 7.5 cm (Enhanced) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop Button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
❈ For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in chapter 4.
Steering Easy Access
• On: The steering wheel will automatically move forward or rearward for the driver to enter or exit
the vehicle comfortably.
• Off: The steering easy access function will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in chapter 4.
Driver Convenience
Haptic Steering System Switch (if equipped)
Adjust the rotating effort of the haptic switch on the steering wheel for LCD display control (Strong, Normal, Mild).
❈ For the haptic switch, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
744
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(km or mi.) and period (months).
• Off : The service interval function
will be deactivated.
• On : You can set the service inter-
val (mileage and months).
Quick Guide (if equipped)
This mode provides quick guides for
the Head Up Display (HUD), Blind
Spot Detection (BSD) System,
Smart Cruise Control (SCC) System,
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS), and so on.
For the details of each system, refer
to the owner’s manual.
OVIEDI3922
475
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Press Start Button and Shift to "P"
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to turn off the engine with
the shift lever in N (Neutral) posi-
tion (If you turn off the engine with
the shift lever in D (Drive) or R
(Reverse), the shift lever will be
automatically changed to P (Park)
position).
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
OVIEDI3924
OVIEDI3926
Features of your vehicle
764
• In this case, you can turn off the
engine as follows.
1. Shift to P (Park) position with the
Engine Start/Stop Button in ON
position (If the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in ACC position,
change into ON position by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
Button once).
2. Turn off the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, we recommend
that the vehicle be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Press brake pedal to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
OVIEDI3927 OVIEDI3928
477
Features of your vehicle
Press start button with smart key
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Low Key Battery
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Key not detected
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
OVIEDI3929 OVIEDI3930 OVIEDI3931
Features of your vehicle
784
Key not in vehicle
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Press start button while turn
steering
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
Steering wheel unlocked
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
OVIEDI3932
OVIEDI3933
OVIEDI3934
479
Features of your vehicle
Check steering wheel lock system
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Align steering wheel
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
Door / Hood / Trunk Open
• It means that any door, hood, or
trunk is open.
OVIEDI3935 OVIEDI3936 OVIEDI3937
Features of your vehicle
804
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.
Window Open
This warning message illuminates if
you turn off the engine when any
window is open.
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
OVIEDI3938 OVIEDI3939 OVIEDI3940
481
Features of your vehicle
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch under the steer-
ing wheel is OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
❈ For more details, refer to “Fuses”
in chapter 7.
Low Tire Pressure
• This warning message illuminates
if the tire pressure is low with the
Engine/Start Button in ON position.
❈ For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Check Fuel Cap
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuel filler cap is opened or is
not tightened securely. Tighten the
fuel filler cap securely.
OVIEDI3941 OVIEDI3943 OVIEDI3944
Features of your vehicle
824
Check Power System
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery voltage is abnormally
low, or the battery has poor per-
formance. We recommend that the
vehicle be inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Check BSD System (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Blind Spot Detection (BSD) sys-
tem. And the light on the BSD
switch will turn off and the BSD
system will be automatically deac-
tivated. We recommend that the
vehicle be inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to "Blind
Spot Detection (BSD) System" in
chapter 5.
OVIEDI3945 OVIEDI3946 OVIEDI3947
483
Features of your vehicle
Service Engine Immediately
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
engine. And the vehicle speed is
limited. We recommend that the
vehicle be inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check LED Headlamp Fan
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
cooling fan of the LED headlamp.
We recommend that the vehicle be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check LED Headlamp
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction with the LED
headlamp. We recommend that the
vehicle be inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
OVIEDI3949
OVIEDI3950 OVIEDI3951
Features of your vehicle
844
Check PSB
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Pre-safe Seat Belt (PSB) system.
We recommend that the vehicle be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to "Seat
Belt" in chapter 3.
Check ECS (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Electronic Controlled Suspension
(ECS) system. We recommend that
the vehicle be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to
"Electronic Controlled Suspension
(ECS)" in chapter 5.
✽
NOTICE - ECS Warning
Message
When there is a malfunction with
the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), the Electronic Controlled
Suspension (ECS) warning message
may illuminate as well as the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light.
OVIEDI3952 OVIEDI3953
485
Features of your vehicle
Check SCC System (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
advanced smart cruise control sys-
tem. We recommend that the vehi-
cle be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control
System" in chapter 5.
Check SCC Radar (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the radar of the advanced smart
cruise control system or its cover is
stained. Remove the stains with a
soft cloth.
❈ For more details, refer to
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control
System" in chapter 5.
CAUTION - ECS Warning
Message
• If the Electronic Controlled
Suspension (ECS) Warning
Message illuminates when
there is no air in the suspen-
sion, the vehicle height will be
very low. In this case, do not
drive the vehicle to protect it
from the projections on the
surface of the ground. We rec-
ommend that the vehicle be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• When towing the vehicle, you
should follow the instruction
in "Electronic Controlled
Suspension (ECS)" of chapter
5.
OVIEDI3954 OVIEDI3955
Features of your vehicle
864
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
• Type A : To change the trip mode,
press the or button.
• Type B : To change the trip mode,
rotate the haptic switch.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display control" in this chapter
TRIP COMPUTER
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
487
Features of your vehicle
Trip A/B
✽
NOTICE
If you reset one of the tripmeter,
elapsed time, and average vehicle
speed, they will be reset all together.
❈ For more details of OK button,
refer to the "LCD Display Control"
in this chapter
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km
or mi.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
OK button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
Elapsed Time (2)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
✽
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
Average Vehicle Speed (3)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• To reset the average vehicle
speed, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not
displayed if the driving distance
has been less than 300 meters (0.19
miles) since the Engine Start/Stop
button was turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
OVIEDI3905
Features of your vehicle
884
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 50 ~ 999 km or
30 ~ 999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below 50
km (30 mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not regis-
ter additional fuel if less than 6
liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are
added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Instant Fuel Economy (2)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 20
L/100km or 0 ~ 50 MPG
Average Fuel Economy (3)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
OVIEDI3906
489
Features of your vehicle
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average fuel economy
is displayed.
❈ For more details of OK button,
refer to the "LCD Display Control"
in this chapter
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the "Auto Reset" mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to "LCD Display").
Under "Auto Reset" mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 300 meters (0.19 miles) since
the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to ON.
Features of your vehicle
904
Warning lights
✽
NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
491
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required (For
more details, refer to "Brake Fluid"
in chapter 7). Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks. If any
leak on the brake system is still
found, the warning light remains
on, or the brakes do not operate
properly, do not drive the vehicle.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle towed to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Features of your vehicle
924
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Parking Brake
& Brake Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
We recommend you have the
vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
493
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, we recommend you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
944
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either the
alternator or electrical charging system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
CAUTION - Engine
Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
495
Features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is
low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available,
we recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure
Warning light
•
If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
•
If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2.Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “E” can cause the
engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
Features of your vehicle
964
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tires
are displayed on the LCD display).
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk lid is not closed
securely.
WARNING - Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
497
Features of your vehicle
Overspeed Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• When you drive the vehicle more
than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime
also sound for approximately 5
seconds.
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light
remains on, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE - Electric Parking
Brake (EPB)
Warning Light
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
Warning Light may illuminate when
the Electronic Stability control
(ESC) Indicator Light comes on to
indicates that the ESC is not work-
ing properly (This does not indicate
malfunction of the EPB).
AFLS
120
km/h
EPB
Features of your vehicle
984
LED Headlamp Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlamp.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with a
LED headlamp related part.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates
• when there is a malfunction on the
pre-safe seat belt, electronic con-
trol suspension, or advanced smart
cruise control. To identify the details
of the warning, look at the LCD dis-
play.
CAUTION - LED Headlamp
Warning Light
Continuous driving with the
LED Headlamp Warning Light
on or blinking can reduce LED
headlamp (low beam) life.
499
Features of your vehicle
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to "Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
Features of your vehicle
1004
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may a malfunction with the turn signal
system. In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
Low Beam Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
4101
Features of your vehicle
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Rear Fog Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the rear fog lights are on.
Cruise Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
❈ For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
❈ For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5.
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to “Auto
Hold” in chapter 5.
CRUISE
SET
AUTO
HOLD
Features of your vehicle
1024
Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS)
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [White] When system operating
conditions are not satisfied or
when the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 5.
Advanced Vehicle Safety
Management (AVSM)
OFF Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the AVSM sys-
tem by setting on the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
If this indicator stays on when VSM
OFF is not selected, the AVSM may
have malfunctioned.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to “Advanced
Vehicle Safety Management
(AVSM) System” in chapter 5.
SPORT/SNOW Mode
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select "SPORT/SNOW"
mode as drive mode.
❈ For more details, refer to "Drive
mode integrated control system"
in chapter 5.
✽
NOTICE
If you activate the Driving Mode
Theme on the User Settings Mode of
the LCD display (if equipped), the
SPORT and SNOW indicators will
not turn on the instrument cluster.
VSM
OFF
SPORT
4103
Features of your vehicle
ECO Indicator Light
(if equipped)
The ECO indicator light informs you
to drive economically, and turns on
green in accordance with the driving
condition.
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] when you are driving eco-
nomically.
• The drive’s driving habit and road
condition can affect fuel efficiency.
• The light will not display :
- If the condition does not meet
economical driving such as P
(Park), N (Neutral), R (Reverse),
or sports mode.
- While the instant fuel Economy of
the trip computer is display on the
LCD display.
• On the "User Settings Mode" of the
LCD display, you can activate or
deactivate the ECO driving mode.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
Intelligent Accelerator
Pedal Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you activate the intelligent
accelerator pedal on the "User
Setting Mode" of the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
When the ECO indicator light turns
on red, the intelligent accelerator
pedal (if equipped) becomes more
stiff to prevent a sudden accelerator.
❈ For more details, refer to
"Intelligent Accelerator Pedal" in
chapter 5.
ECO ECO-P
WARNING
Do not watch the ECO indicator
light while driving. This will dis-
tract you and may cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury.
Features of your vehicle
1044
Description
The head up display is a transparent
display which projects a shadow of
some information of the instrument
cluster and navigation on the wind-
shield glass.
• The head up display image on the
windshield glass may be invisible
when:
- Sitting posture is bad.
- Wearing a polarized sunglasses.
- There is an object on the cover of
the head up display.
- Driving on a wet road.
- An inadequate lighting is turned
on inside the vehicle.
- Any light comes from the outside.
- Wearing glasses.
• If the head up display image is not
shown well, adjust the height or
illumination of the head up display
in the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
• When the head up display needs
inspection or repair, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI043412
WARNING - Head Up
Display
• Do not tint the front windshield
glass or add other types of
metallic coating. Otherwise, the
head up display image may be
invisible.
• Do not place any accessories
on the crash pad or attach any
objects on the windshield
glass.
• As the Blind Spot Detection
(BSD) system is a supplemen-
tal device for your safe driving,
it may be dangerous to rely on
only the BSD information of the
head up display image when
changing the lane. Always pay
attention to drive safely.
4105
Features of your vehicle
Head Up Display ON/OFF
To activate the head up display,
press the HUD button.
If you press the HUD button again,
the head up display will be deactivat-
ed.
Head Up Display Information
1. Cruise setting speed
2. Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) information (if equipped)
3. Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) information (if equipped)
4. Road signs
5. Speedometer
6. Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation infor-
mation (if equipped)
7. Blind Spot Detection (BSD) sys-
tem information (if equipped)
8. Warning lights (Low fuel, BSD)
CAUTION
When replacing the front wind-
shield glass of the vehicles
equipped with the head up dis-
play, replace it with a windshield
glass designed for the head up
display operation. Otherwise,
duplicated images may be dis-
played on the windshield glass.
OVI043413 OVIDDI3976N
Features of your vehicle
1064
On the "User settings Mode" of the
LCD display, you can activate or
deactive the Turn By Turn (TBT) nav-
igation, Smart Cruise Control (SCC),
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS), and Blind Spot Detection
(BSD) system information.
✽
NOTICE
If you select the Turn By Turn (TBT)
navigation information as HUD con-
tents, the Turn By Turn (TBT) navi-
gation information will not be dis-
played on the LCD Display.
Head Up Display Setting
On the LCD display, you can change
the head up display settings as fol-
lows.
1. Display height
2. Illumination
3. Font color
4. Font size
5. Contents setting
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
4107
Features of your vehicle
The parking assist system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 100 cm
(39 in.) in front and 120 cm (47 in.)
behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever moving pay as much
attention to what is in front and
behind of you as you would in a vehi-
cle without a parking assist system.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the
parking assist button is pressed with
the engine start/stop button ON.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
WARNING
The parking assist system
should only be considered as a
supplementary function. The
driver must check the front and
rear view. The operational func-
tion of the parking assist system
can be affected by many factors
and conditions of the surround-
ings, so the responsibility rests
always with the driver.
OVI043071
OVI043072
Sensor
■ Front
■ Rear
Sensor
OVI043073
OVI043074
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1084
• The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the
parking assist system when you
shift the gear to the R (Reverse)
position. It will turn off automatical-
ly when you shift out of R (Reverse)
and drive above 20 km/h.
• The sensing distance while backing
up is approximately 120 cm when
you are driving less than 10 km/h.
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 100 cm
when you are driving less than 10
km/h.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
✽
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance
from the object is already less than
approximately 25 cm when the sys-
tem is ON.
✽
NOTICE
The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status.
If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Types of warning sound and indicator
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
4109
Features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water.
(Sensing range will return to nor-
mal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Features of your vehicle
1104
✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm from the sensor,
or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a
soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor. Always per-
form a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
4111
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the shift lever
into the R (Reverse) position, this may
indicate a malfunction in the parking
assist system. If this occurs, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a park-
ing assist system. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
Features of your vehicle
1124
The rearview camera will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
engine start/stop button ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
✽
NOTICE
The rearview camera may not oper-
ate normally, when you drive in
extremely high or low temperature
area. (operating temperature: -20°C
~ 65°C (-4°F ~ 149°F))
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI043077
WARNING
• This system is a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the inside/out-
side rearview mirror and the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that can't
be seen through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered
with foreign matter, the cam-
era may not operate normally.
4113
Features of your vehicle
This function assists you when
reverse parking (back-in parking) or
parallel parking.
The parking guide system is only
available when the vehicle speed is
less than 10km/h.
Reverse parking
(Back-in parking)
1. Drive the vehicle to a proper place
to park.
2. Stop the vehicle and shift the
transmission lever to the R posi-
tion.
3. Select the reverse parking mode
by touching the icon on the
screen.
4. The parking guide line show on
the screen.
PARKING GUIDE SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This is a supplementary sys-
tem. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area around the vehicle when
parking the vehicle.
OVI043078
Features of your vehicle
1144
5. Turn the steering wheel so that the
parking guide line is aligned with
the parking area.
6. Hold the steering wheel and care-
fully back up the vehicle until the
screen changes.
7. Carefully back up the vehicle while
fitting the steering wheel guide line
to the parking area by turning the
steering wheel.
8. After parking, you can check the
bottom of the rear bumper by
selecting the icon "Top View" on
the screen.
Parallel parking
1. Stop the vehicle at a distance of
approximately 1 meter (3 feet) par-
allel to the parked vehicle (1) that
is in front of the desired parking
space. Make sure that the front of
the parked vehicle (1) is parallel to
your rear wheel.
2. Stop the vehicle and shift the trans-
mission lever to the R position.
3. Select the parallel parking mode
by touching the icon on
the screen.
OVI049173OVI049172
OVI049177
4115
Features of your vehicle
4. Back up carefully parallel to the
parked vehicle (1) until the vertical
red guide line (2) is at the end of
the parked vehicle (1).
5. Stop the vehicle.
6. With the vehicle at standstill, turn
the steering wheel to the direction
of the parking space. The guide
lines will blink.
7. Continue turning the steering
wheel until the guide lines stop
blinking.
8. Hold the steering wheel and care-
fully back up the vehicle until the
green guide line (1) is aligned with
the target parking line.
9. Stop the vehicle
10. With the vehicle at standstill, turn
the steering wheel to the oppo-
site direction until the screen
changes.
11. Carefully back up the vehicle by
referring to the steering wheel
guide line (2).
12. After parking, you can check the
bottom of the rear bumper by
selecting the icon "Top View" on
the screen.
OVI049175 OVI049179 OVI049180L
Features of your vehicle
1164
This is the parking support system to
show around circumstance when you
park the vehicle in monitor. When
you push the button in [ON] position,
it is operated. To cancel the system,
push again.
Operating conditions
- When ignition is ON
- When the transaxle is on D, N or R
- When the vehicle speed is not over
20km/h
• When the vehicle speed is over
20km/h, the AVM system is turned
off. If the vehicle speed is not over
20km/h after turning off the AVM
by over speed, the AVM is not
turned on. To operate again, push
the button.
• When the vehicle moves back-
wards, regardless of On/Off of but-
ton and vehicle speed, the AVM is
operated. And then, if you shift to
the D position and the driving
speed is over 10km/h the AVM is
deactivated.
• When the trunk and driver/passen-
ger door are opened and the out-
side mirror is folded, the warning is
illuminated in AVM system.
• If the AVM system is not normally
operated, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
* AVM : Around View Monitoring
AROUND VIEW MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI043400
4117
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the position lamps when
the driver turns off the engine and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the position
lamps will be turned off automati-
cally if the driver parks on the side
of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off per-
form the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the position lamps OFF
and ON again.
Headlamp escort function
The headlamps (and/or position lamp)
will remain on for approximately 5 min-
utes after the engine start/stop button
is turned to the ACC or OFF position.
However, if the driver’s door is opened
and closed, the headlamps are turned
off after 15 seconds.
The headlamps can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the smart
key twice or turning off the light
switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
❈
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric. If you go abroad to a
country with opposite traffic direc-
tion, this asymmetric part will dazzle
oncoming car driver. To prevent daz-
zle, ECE regulation demand several
technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet,
down aiming). This headlamps are
designed not to dazzle opposite driv-
ers. So, you need not change your
headlamps in a country with oppo-
site traffic direction.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehi-
cle through other doors (except
driver's door), the battery saver
function does not operate.
Therefore, it causes the battery
to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
1184
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light / AFLS position
(3) Position lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
Auto light/AFLS position
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the position lamp and
headlamp will be turned ON or OFF
automatically depending on the
amount of light outside the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
adaptive front lighting system
(AFLS), it will also operate when the
headlamp is ON.
OVI043092
ODM042244
OVI043501
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
• Never place anything near the
sensor, this will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work
properly.
4119
Features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle speed,
to keep your field of vision wide by
swiveling and leveling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling oper-
ates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Position lamp position ( )
When the light switch is in the posi-
tion lamp position, the position,
license and instrument panel lights
will turn ON.
OVI043091
OVIDDI2916/OVI043425
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODM042245
Features of your vehicle
1204
Headlamp position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
lamp position, the head, position,
license and instrument panel lights
will turn ON.
✽
NOTICE
The engine start/stop button must
be in the ON position to turn on the
headlamps.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
ODM042246 OVI043426
WARNING
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
4121
Features of your vehicle
To flash the headlamp, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released.
The headlamp switch does not need
to be on to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The engine start/stop button must be
on for the turn signals to function. To
turn on the turn signals, move the
lever up or down (A). The green
arrow indicators on the instrument
panel indicate which turn signal is
operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch turn signal
To activate an one-touch turn signal
move the turn signal lever slightly
and then release it. The lane change
signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times.
You can set the number of operating
times. Refer to "LCD Display" in this
chapter.
✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
ODM042248
ODM042250
Features of your vehicle
1224
Front fog light
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
1. Turn on the position lamp.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3. To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the posi-
tion lamp.
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
rear fog light switch (1) to the on posi-
tion when the headlight is turned on.
Also, the rear fog lights turn on when
the rear fog light switch is turned on
after the front fog light switch (if
equipped) is turned on and the head-
lamp switch is in the position lamp
position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the
rear fog light switch to the on position
again, turn off the position lamp, or
turn off the front fog light.
ODM042251
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehi-
cle electrical power. Only use the
fog lights when visibility is poor
or unnecessary battery and gen-
erator drain could occur.
ODMECO2016
4123
Features of your vehicle
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn OFF when:
1. The parking light switch is ON.
2. Engine stops.
Headlamp leveling device
It is automatically adjusted the head-
lamp beam level according to the
number of the passengers and the
loading weight in the luggage area.
And it offers the proper headlamp
beam under the various conditions.
Headlamp washer
If your vehicle is equipped with the
headlamp washer it will be operating
at the same time when you operate
the windshield washer. It will operate
when the headlamp switch is in the
first or second position and the
engine start/stop button is in the ON
position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on
to the headlamps.
✽
NOTICE
• Check the headlamp washers peri-
odically to confirm that the wash-
er fluid is being sprayed properly
onto the headlamp lenses.
• The headlamp washer can be
operated 15 minutes after being
operated last time.
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined
backward according to passen-
ger's posture, or the headlamp
beam is irradiated to the high or
low position, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
Features of your vehicle
1244
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the engine
start/stop button is turned ON.
MIST / V : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward
and release it with the
lever in the OFF position.
The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is
pushed upward and held.
OFF / O : Wiper is not in operation
AUTO : Auto control wipe
LO / 1 : Normal wiper speed
HI / 2 : Fast wiper speed
✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield,
defrost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice
is removed before using the wind-
shield wipers to ensure proper oper-
ation.
If you do not remove the snow
and/or ice before using the wiper
and washer, it may damage the
wiper and washer system.
Auto control
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates. When the rain stops,
the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (B).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the engine start/stop
button is ON, the wiper will operate
once to perform a self-check of the
system. Set the wiper to OFF (O)
position when the wiper is not in use.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OVI043500L
OVI043502L
■ Type A
■ Type B
4125
Features of your vehicle
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON
and the windshield wiper switch
is placed in the AUTO mode, use
caution in the following situa-
tions to avoid any injury to the
hands or other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in
winter, set the wiper switch in
the OFF position. Otherwise,
wipers may operate and ice may
damage the windshield wiper
blades. Always remove all snow
and ice and defrost the wind-
shield properly prior to operat-
ing the windshield wipers.
OVI043099
OVI043099L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
1264
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use gaso-
line, kerosene, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near
them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers and washer sys-
tem, use anti-freezing washer
fluids in the winter season or
cold weather.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on contact
with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
4127
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
Front
(1) Front map lamp
(2) Front room lamp
• : Press the button to turn the
map lamp on. This light
produces a spot beam for
convenient use as a map
lamp at night or as a per-
sonal lamp for the driver
and the front passenger. To
turn the lamp off, press the
button again.
• DOOR : The front and rear room
lamps come on for approx-
imately 30 seconds when
doors are unlocked with
the smart key as long as
the doors are not opened.
When the engine start/stop
button is in the ACC or
OFF position, if any door is
opened, the front or rear
room lamp will stay on for
approximately 20 minutes.
If the door is closed, the
lamps will go out in 30 sec-
onds.
The front and rear room
lamps will go out immedi-
ately if the engine start/stop
button is changed to the
ON position with all doors
closed.
When the engine start/stop
button is in the ON position,
if any door is opened, the
front or rear room lamp will
stay on continuously. If the
door is closed, the lamp will
go out immediately.
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OVI049100
■ Front
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Features of your vehicle
1284
•
ROOM
: Pressing the button, turns
the front and rear room
lamps on. To turn the
lamps off, press the
ROOM button again.
Rear
(1) Rear map lamp
(2) Rear room lamp
• : Press the button to turn the
rear lamp on. To turn the
lamp off, press the button
again.
• ROOM : Pressing the button, turns
the rear room lamps on. To
turn the lamps off, press
the ROOM button again.
CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches
on for an extended period of time
when the vehicle is not running.
OVI049101
■ Rear
4129
Features of your vehicle
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
OVI049103OVI043102
CAUTION
The trunk room lamp comes on
as long as the trunk lid opens.
To prevent unnecessary charg-
ing system drain, close the
trunk lid securely after using the
trunk room.
OVI043104
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charg-
ing system drain, close the
glove box securely after using
the glove box.
Features of your vehicle
1304
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
OVI049105
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary charg-
ing system drain, close the van-
ity mirror cover after using the
mirror.
4131
Features of your vehicle
Puddle lamp
When all the doors (and trunk) are
locked and closed, the puddle lamp
will come on for about 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When you put your hand into the
door handle while carrying the
smart key.
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Also, if the outside rearview mirror
folding switch is in the AUTO posi-
tion, the outside rearview mirror will
unfold automatically.
Headlight
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and
all doors (and trunk) are locked and
closed, the position light and head-
light will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the position light and
headlight will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When you put your hand into the
door handle while carrying the
smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
WELCOME SYSTEM
OVI043402
Features of your vehicle
1324
✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield defrosting and defog-
ging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will be operating at
the same time you turn on the rear
window defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OVI043106
4133
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Driver’s temperature control knob
2. Front windshield defrost button
3. Rear window defrost button
4. AUTO (automatic control) button
5. Fan speed control button
6. OFF button
7. Air intake control button /
AQS (Air quality system) button
8. Air conditioning button
9. 3 zone (Driver, passenger and rear side)
control button
10. Passenger’s temperature control knob
11. Mode selection button
12. Climate information screen selection
button
13. Fan speed control button
14. Off button (Rear)
15. Mode selection button (Rear)
16. AUTO (automatic control) button
17. Rear side temperature control button
18. AUTO (automatic control) or off button
19. LCD display
OVI043107/OVI043423/OVI043424/OVI043421
■ Front
■ Rear
• Type A • Type B
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the
engine start/stop button is in
the ON position could cause the
battery to discharge. Operate
the blower when the engine is
running.
Features of your vehicle
1344
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2. Press the TEMP button to set the
desired temperature.
✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
OVI043114
OVI043417
■ Front
■ Rear
• Type A • Type B
OVI043108
OVI043431
■ Front
■ Rear
4135
Features of your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
Never place anything near the sensor
to ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this
case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed. When pressing any button except
the AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
3 Zone control button
1. Press the 3 zone button to operate
the front passenger's temperature,
rear side temperature, and rear
side mode individually. The indica-
tor on the 3 zone button will be illu-
minated. Pressing the rear side
control button or turning the front
passenger's temperature knob will
activate the 3 zone mode as well.
2. Press the 3 zone button again to
deactivate the 3 zone mode. The
front passenger's temperature,
rear side temperature, and rear
side mode will be set like the dri-
ver's side.
OVI043109
OVI043405
Features of your vehicle
1364
✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
rear climate control button on the
rear armrest by using the REAR
LOCK button on the rear armrest or
in AVN (Audio, Video, and
Navigation).
Detailed information for AVN is
described in a separately supplied
manual.
OVI043111
4137
Features of your vehicle
❈
Rear outlet vents (F)
• The air flow of the Rear outlet
vents is controlled by the front cli-
mate control system and delivered
through the inside air duct of the
front doors. If the door is open or
not closed completely, the air flow
of the Rear outlet vent is not deliv-
ered properly. Make sure the front
doors are closed completely.
• The air flow of the Rear outlet
vents may be weaker than the
instrument panel vents for the long
air duct in the front doors.
Mode selection
Front button
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Face-Level (B, D, F, G)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G, H)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
OVI043115
OVI043403
OVI043416
■ Rear - Type A
■ Front
■ Rear - Type B
Features of your vehicle
1384
Floor & Defrost (A, C, E, D, H)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, E, D, H)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Rear button
If you press the rear mode selection
button, the indicator on the 3 Zone
button will be illuminated, and you
can adjust the rear mode individual-
ly. If you press the 3 Zone button, the
indicator on the 3 Zone button will be
turned off, and the rear mode will be
operated like the front mode.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Face-level (G)
Air flow is toward the upper body and
face
Bi-level (G, H)
Air flow is toward the face and floor
Floor lever (H)
Air flow is toward the floor.
✽
NOTICE
If the front windshield defrost but-
ton is pressed, the rear air flow is not
operated.
4139
Features of your vehicle
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left
to the maximum position. To open the
vent, rotate it right to the desired
position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the right for the front seat and pressing
the up ( ) button for the rear seat.
OVI043112 OVI043113
OVI043116
OVI043404
■ Front
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
1404
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the left for the front seat and pressing
the down ( ) button for the rear seat.
When turning the knob for the front
seat and pressing the button for the
rear seat, the temperature will
increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
When set to the lowest temperature
setting, the air conditioning will oper-
ate continuously.
If you turn the front passenger's tem-
perature knob or if you press the rear
temperature button, the indicator on
the 3 Zone button will be illuminated,
and you can adjust the front passen-
ger's and rear temperature individual-
ly. If you press the 3 Zone button, the
indicator on the 3 Zone button will be
turned off, and the front passenger's
and rear temperature will be adjusted
like the driver's temperature.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
This is a normal condition. You can
switch the temperature mode between
Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows;
While pressing the OFF button,
depress the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds or more.The display will change
from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or
from Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
OVI043117
4141
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
WARNING
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
Features of your vehicle
1424
Air quality system
The air inflow from outside the vehi-
cle can be automatically controlled.
Press the button to activate the air
quality control system.
When using AQS mode, AQS(Air
Quality System) automatically sens-
es outdoor air pollutants and mini-
mizes them from entering the vehi-
cle, however, unpleasant or foul
odors that might be present may still
be noticeable within the vehicle.
Exhaust gas cutoff mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
If exhaust gas enters the vehicle from
the outside, the exhaust gas cutoff
mode is automatically converted from
the outside air position to the recircu-
lated air position to prevent exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged
operation of the heating system in
recirculation mode will give rise to
misting of the windshield and side
windows and the air within the pas-
senger compartment will become
stale. In addition, prolonged use of
the air conditioning with the recir-
culation mode selected may result in
the air within the passenger com-
partment becoming excessively dry.
OVI043118
CAUTION
If the windows fog up with the
Recirculation or A.Q.S mode
selected, set the air intake con-
trol to the fresh air position or
A.Q.S control to OFF.
4143
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pushing the fan
speed control button.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as long as
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
When the OFF button of the rear is
pressed, the rear blower will turn off.
OVI043120
OVI043121
OVI043419
■ Front
■ Rear
• Type A • Type B
OVI043119
OVI043418
■ Front
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
1444
Climate information screen selec-
tion button
To change the screen into the cli-
mate information screen, push the
button.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or press the front
defrost button ( ).
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recircu-
lated air position. Be sure to return
the control to the fresh air position
when the irritation has passed to
keep fresh air in the vehicle. This
will help keep the driver alert and
comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
OVI043123
4145
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friend-
ly refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condi-
tioning should only be run with
the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
Features of your vehicle
1464
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristics.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate con-
trol air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
4147
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
Features of your vehicle
1484
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi-
ent temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
OVI043122
4149
Features of your vehicle
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4. The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected
ambient temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
OVI043124
Features of your vehicle
1504
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system
Auto defogging reduces the probabil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture of inside the wind-
shield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 3 :
Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
OVI043125
OVI049124
4151
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automat-
ically activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button 4
times within 2 seconds while press-
ing the AUTO button. The front
defroster indicator will blink 3 times
to notify you that the system is can-
celled. To use the auto defogging
system again, follow the procedures
mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽
NOTICE
• If the A/C off is manually selected
while the auto defogging system is
on, the auto defogging indicator
will blink 3 times to give notice
that manual operation is canceled.
• If the air quality system (AQS) is
selected while the auto defogging
system is operating at the step 1
outside air position, the recirculat-
ed air position may operate when
the outside air is polluted.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
1524
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
push the button (1) or (2).
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key of
the smart key (1).
To open the glove box, pull the lever
(2) and the glove box will automati-
cally open. Close the glove box after
use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
cannot close securely.
OVI043183 OVI043184
4153
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out. To close the sun-
glass holder, push it up.
OVI049129
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an opened sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or defor-
mation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
Features of your vehicle
1544
Rear console storage Cool and warm box
(if equipped)
To open the box, pull up the lever(1).
OVI043127
OVI049228L
OVI039030
■ Type B
■ Type B
■ Type A
OVI043187
OVI043188
To open the console storage, push
the open button. After using the con-
sole storage, make sure to close it.
4155
Features of your vehicle
If you press the operate button (2)
once, the indicator on the button will
be illuminated blue and then you can
keep drinks cool. If you press the
operate button (2) once more, the
indicator on the button will be
changed to amber and then you can
keep drinks warm.
To stop operating, press the operate
button (2) once more. The indicator
on the button will be turned off.
It takes about 5 minutes to swift from
warming mode to cooling mode or
from cooling mode to warming mode.
There are partitions in the box to fix
the drink. You can remove the parti-
tions to fit bigger size bottles. Be
careful not to damage the partitions.
WARNING
We recommend that the cool
and warm box be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Inappropriate repair causes
damage resulting in a fire and
injury.
CAUTION
• When you operate the cooling
mode, if the drink temperature
is high, it takes a long time to
cool the drink.To use the cool-
ing mode efficiently, put a cool
drink in the box.
• When you operate the warm-
ing mode, if the drink temper-
ature is low, it takes a long
time to warm the drink. To use
the warming mode efficiently,
put a warm drink in the box.
• If the cover does not close
securely, the efficiency will be
low and frost will occur. Always
close the cover securely.
• If you attempt to close the
cover by force when drinks
are not put in the box correct-
ly, it will damage the cover.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Because the temperature of
the box bottom is very low, be
sure frost does not occur on
the drink.
• Put the cap on the bottle
securely when you put the
bottle in the box.
• Do not put sharp or any other
object except drinks in the
box. It will damage the box.
• If you keep food in the box for
a long time, the food may get
spoiled and smells.
• When you clean the inside of
the box, use a soft cloth. Don't
use strong soap, chemical
detergents.
Features of your vehicle
1564
OVI043189
OVI049190
CAUTION
There is the air inlet at the cen-
ter of the rear seat and the air
outlet at the inside of the trunk.
If the air inlet is blocked, the effi-
ciency will be lower. If the air
inlet is blocked for a long time,
the box may be damaged.
Do not let the air inlet and outlet
be blocked.
4157
Features of your vehicle
Ashtray
Front
To open the cover, press the cover
and it will slowly open. To clean the
ashtray, the plastic receptacle should
be removed by lifting the plastic ash-
tray receptacle upward and pulling it
out.
Rear (if equipped)
Use the rear ashtray after spreading
the cover (1).
To clean the ashtray, the plastic
receptacle should be removed by lift-
ing the plastic ashtray receptacle
upward and pulling it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ash-
trays as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or match-
es in an ashtray with other
combustible materials may
cause a fire.
OVI043131 OVI049132
Features of your vehicle
1584
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Front
To open the cover, press the cover
and it will slowly open.
Rear (A)
To open the cover, press the button
and it will slowly open.
Rear (B) (if equipped)
To open the cover, press the cover
and it will slowly open.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of a per-
sonal injury in the event of a
sudden stop or collision, do
not place uncovered or unse-
cured bottles, glasses, cans,
etc., in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion.
OVI043133
OVI049134
OVI043192
■ Front
■ Rear (A) (if equipped)
■ Rear (B) (if equipped)
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a vehicle that is heated
up. It may explode.
4159
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
Rear vanity mirror
(if equipped)
To use the rear vanity mirror, press
the cover and it will slowly open and
the mirror lamp will turn on.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvi-
sor to its original position after
use. If the vanity mirror is not
closed securely, the lamp will
stay on and could result in bat-
tery discharge and possible
sunvisor damage.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct
your vision when using the sun-
visor.
OVI049201
OVI049141
CAUTION
Close the mirror cover securely.
If the mirror cover is not closed,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and
possible mirror damage.
Features of your vehicle
1604
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
When using the front power outlet,
you can close the center console
cover after pulling out the wire
through the front corner of the both
side of the console.
(The USB charger and cable is not
provided in your vehicle.)
OVI043503
OVI043185
OVI043136
OVI043186
■ Rear (A) (if equipped)
■ Front
■ Rear (B) (if equipped)
4161
Features of your vehicle
Clock
You can set the clock by using the
Audio or Navigation system.
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only
when the engine is running
and remove the accessory
plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the
engine off could cause the
battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 10A
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
OVI014005
Features of your vehicle
1624
Clock settings
with Navigation model
- GPS Time check
The clock is automatically updated
through the GPS time.
- GPS Time non-check
The clock can be manually adjusted.
1. Select the "System Settings" in the
"INFO" screen.
2. Select the "Clock Settings".
3. Select the "Time Settings" by
rotating the controller on the cen-
ter console panel.
Without Navigation model
The clock can be manually adjusted.
1. Select the "System Settings" in the
"INFO" screen.
2. Select the "Clock Settings".
3. Select the "Time Settings" by
rotating the controller on the cen-
ter console panel.
For more details, please refer to the
Audio or Navigation Manual that was
supplied with your vehicle.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OVI049140
WARNING
Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident it
may cause vehicle damage or
personal injury.
4163
Features of your vehicle
Bag hanger (if equipped)
Pull the strap (1) to hang a bag on
the hook (2).
When you are not use the hook, fold
the hook.
Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
OVI043427
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that only the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
OVI043212
Features of your vehicle
1644
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
Rear curtain (if equipped)
To fold the rear curtain, press the
button. To unfold the rear curtain,
press the button again.
The rear curtain will be folded auto-
matically when you shift the shift
lever into R (Reverse) and unfolded
automatically when you shift the shift
lever from R (Reverse) into P (Park).
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net,
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use when
the strap has visible signs of
wear or damage.
OVI043143
■ Front
OVI049191
4165
Features of your vehicle
After the rear curtain is folded by
shifting the shift lever into R
(Reverse), if you drive more than
20km/h with the shift lever in D
(Drive), the rear curtain will be
unfolded automatically.
CAUTION
Do not pull or fold the rear cur-
tain by hand. It could cause
motor failure.
OVI043144
OVI043217
■ Rear (B) (if equipped)
■ Rear (A) (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1664
✽
NOTICE
• If you install an aftermarket HID
headlamp, your vehicle’s audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
• Prevent chemicals such as per-
fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner, and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
You can use an aux port to connect
audio devices a USB port to plug in a
USB, and an iPod
®
port to plug in an
iPod
®
.
✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna
When the radio is turned on with the
engine start/stop button in the ON or
ACC position, your car will receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals
through the antenna.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OVI044409
OVI043149L
OVI043149E
■ Type A
■ Type B
4167
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel audio control
The steering wheel audio control but-
ton is installed to promote safe driving.
CAUTION
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a
cleaner or use a scraper to
remove foreign deposits as
this may cause damage to the
antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coat-
ings such as Ni, Cd, and so
on. These can disturb receiv-
ing AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals.
OVI043155
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
CAUTION
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaner containing abrasives
to clean the window. Clean the
inside surface of the rear
glass window with a piece of
soft cloth.
• When putting a sticker on the
inside surface of the rear win-
dow, be careful not to damage
to the rear glass antenna.
• Do not put sharp instruments
nearby the rear glass antenna.
• Tinted rear window may affect
the proper functioning of the
antenna.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Press the up button (+) to increase
volume.
• Press the down button (-) to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for 0.8 second or more, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 second, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION select buttons.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, disc, or AUX.
MUTE (4)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel
the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to
activate the sound.
✽
NOTICE
Detailed information is described in
a separately supplied manual.
4168
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Engine start/stop button position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Automatic transmission (Shift by wire) . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Automatic transmission operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
• Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
• Auto hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Drive mode / Snow mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Electronic controlled suspension (ECS) . . . . . . . . 5-46
• To control the vehicle height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• ECS (electronic controlled suspension) malfunction
warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• Cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Advanced smart cruise control system. . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Smart cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Smart cruise control vehicle to vehicle distance. . . . 5-60
• Distance to distance vehicle sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
• To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-70
• LDWS operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Intelligent accelerator pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Advanced vehicle safety management (AVSM). . 5-75
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
• Operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Warning type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
• Detecting sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
• Warning message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Rear cross traffic alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Warning type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
5
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . . 5-95
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system . 5-95
• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-95
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
• Don't place foreign objects or materials in
the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
• Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
5
53
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the car, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher
speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in section 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be proper-
ly belted whenever the vehicle
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts”
in section 3 for more informa-
tion on their proper use.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol, that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
55
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Drunk driving is the num-
ber one contributor to the high-
way death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more
dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink or take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking
drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a cab.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING
• When you intend to park or
stop the vehicle with the
engine on, be careful not to
depress the accelerator pedal
for a long period of time. It
may overheat the engine or
exhaust system and cause
fire.
• When you make a sudden
stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possi-
bly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely
stored.
• If you do not focus on driving,
it may cause an accident. Be
careful when operating what
may disturb driving such as
audio or heater. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive safely.
Driving your vehicle
65
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
Illuminated engine start/stop
button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the engine start/stop button will illu-
minate for your convenience. The
light will go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
Engine start/stop button posi-
tion
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the engine start/stop but-
ton with the shift lever in P(Park).
When you press the engine
start/stop button without the shift
lever in P(Park), the engine
start/stop button does not turn to the
OFF position but to the ACC posi-
tion.
If you open the driver’s door when
the engine start/stop button is off, the
steering wheel will lock.
✽
NOTICE
• If difficulty is experienced turning
the engine start/stop button to the
ACC position, turn the steering
wheel right and left to release the
tension while pressing the engine
start/stop button.
• When you turn off the engine, the
vehicle should be stopped.
OVI053001K
57
Driving your vehicle
ACC(Accessory)
Press the engine start/stop button
when it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are opera-
tional.
If the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position for more than 1
hour, the button is off automatically
to prevent the battery discharge.
ON
Press the engine start/stop button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started.
Do not leave the engine start/stop
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the engine
start/stop button with the shift lever in
the P(Park) or the N(Neutral) posi-
tion. For your safety, start the engine
with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
✽
NOTICE
• If you press the engine start/stop
button without depressing the
brake pedal, the engine will not
start and the engine start/stop but-
ton changes as follow :
OFF
→
ACC
→
ON
→
OFF
• If you leave the engine start/stop
button in the ACC or the ON posi-
tion for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
WARNING
You are able to turn off the
engine (START/RUN) or vehicle
power (ON), only when the vehi-
cle is not in motion. In an emer-
gency situation while the vehi-
cle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the
engine start/stop button for
more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds.
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
Driving your vehicle
85
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine
start/stop button, or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle con-
trol, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable
objects around the driver’s
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driv-
er and lead to an accident.
WARNING
• Never press the engine
start/stop button while the
vehicle is in motion. This
would result in the engine
turning off and loss of power
assist for the steering and
brakes, which may lead to
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in P (Park), set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precau-
tions are not taken.
(Continued)
59
Driving your vehicle
STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
3. Place the shift lever in the P(Park)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button
is in the ACC or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is
not in the vehicle, the warning,
"Key not in vehicle" will illuminate
on the LCD display. And if all doors
are closed, the chime will sound for
about 5 seconds. The indicator will
turn off while the vehicle is moving.
Keep the smart key in the vehicle,
when using the ACC position or if
the vehicle engine is on.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any per-
son who is unfamiliar with the
vehicle to touch the engine
start/stop button or related
parts.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may
put the shift lever in the
N(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and press
the engine start/stop button in
an attempt to restart the engine.
WARNING
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high
heels, ski boots, etc.) may
interfere with your ability to
use the brake and accelerator
pedal.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and
lead to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-
mal. The vehicle may suddenly
move if the brake pedal is
released when the rpm is high.
Driving your vehicle
105
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly. When
you press the engine start/stop
button directly with the smart key,
the smart key should contact the
button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normal-
ly. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If you are not able to replace
the fuse, you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop
button for 10 seconds with the
engine start/stop button in the
ACC. The engine can start with-
out depressing the brake pedal.
But for your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.
CAUTION
• Do not press the engine start/
stop button for more than 5
seconds except when the stop
lamp fuse is blown.
• Do not press the engine start/
stop button to the START
position with the engine run-
ning. It may damage the
starter.
OVI053003
OVI053004
■ Type B
■ Type A
511
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has 8
forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are
selected automatically, depending on
the position of the shift lever.
✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transmission Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (SHIFT BY WIRE)
OVI053099L
UNLOCK
button
❈ When you shift the transmission, depress the brake pedal with pressing [UNLOCK] button.
Driving your vehicle
125
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
Transmission ranges
When ignition switch is off, cluster
and knob (transaxle lever) display
the shift lever position for 30 sec-
onds.
WARNING - Automatic
transmis-
sion
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a car into D
(Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position; then set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slip-
pery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transmission, do not acceler-
ate the engine in R (Reverse)
or any forward gear position
with the brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline,
do not hold the vehicle sta-
tionary with engine power.
Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral)
or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
513
Driving your vehicle
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transmission and
prevents the drive wheels from rotat-
ing.
To shift the gear from [R], [N], [D] or
[M] to [P], press the [P] button on the
shift lever.
If you turn off the engine in [D], [R] or
[M], the shifting automatically
changes to [P].
If you press the [P] button when the
shifting is on [M] or if you turn the
engine off when the shifting is on [M],
the shift lever is automatically moved
to right side and the shifting is
changed to [P].
When the shift lever is automatically
moved to right side, if you hold the
shift lever by force, the warning mes-
sage will be illuminated in cluster.
Move the shift lever to right side
manually.
When you park the vehicle, press the
[P] button of shift lever with applying
brake pedal and apply the parking
brake.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause
the drive wheels to lock which
will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake. Always make sure the
shift lever is latched in the P
(Park) position and set the
parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattend-
ed in a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transmission may be dam-
aged if you shift into P (Park)
while the vehicle is in motion.
OVI053100L
Driving your vehicle
145
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
To shift the gear to [R] press the
[UNLOCK] button of shift lever with
depressing brake pedal and move
the shift lever forward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
In neutral range if you turn off the
engine, the range will be on [N] and
the ignition position will be on ACC.
To turn off engine :
1.Press the engine start/stop button
to make the ignition position be on
[ON].
2.Press the [P] button.
3.Press the engine start/stop button.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle” in this
section.
OVI053103L
OVI053102L
OVI053101L
515
Driving your vehicle
When you turn off the vehicle in [N]
gear, if you open the driver's door or
front passenger's door, the gear is
automatically changed to [P].
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transmission will auto-
matically shift through a 8-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transmission will
automatically downshift to the lower
gear.
To shift into [D], depress the brake
pedal and press the [UNLOCK] but-
ton of shift lever. And then move the
shift lever to backward.
To shift into [D], from [N] you must
depress the brake pedal.
✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
OVI053106L
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Manual mode
WARNING
Do not drive with the shift lever
in N (Neutral).
The engine brake will not work
and lead to an accident.
Driving your vehicle
165
✽
NOTICE
• In manaul mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manaul mode, only the 8 for-
ward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
or P (Park) position as required.
• In manaul mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
• In manaul mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the +(up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse) or D (Drive) :
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever to R (Reverse)
or D (Drive) with pressing
[UNLOCK] button.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
517
Driving your vehicle
■
When the battery is dis-
charged:
When the battery is discharged, the
automatic transmission (shift by wire)
is not shifted.
In emergency, if you want to shift into
[N], follow actions;
You can shift into [N] by using the
driver if the jump starting is impossi-
ble to do.
Insert the screwdriver (-) to service
hole (1) as direction of clockwise 10
times. The shifting is changed to [N]
from [P] position. If you want to shift
to [P] position, turn the driver count-
er-clockwise.
OVI053108E
CAUTION
If the electric parking brake is
not released, we recommend
that the vehicle is towed as flat-
bed towing.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the car.
Driving your vehicle
185
1.If the transmission is not operated
as normal, the warning will be illu-
minated. We recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
2.If the shift lever has some problem
with main system, the warning will
be illuminated. We recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3.If the shifting condition is not
matched by high engine RPM or
high vehicle speed, the warning
will be illuminated. When you
reduce the engine RPM or vehicle
speed, the shifting will be operat-
ed.
OVIEDR2908 OVIEDR2901 OVIEDR2909
519
Driving your vehicle
4.When you shift the transmission, if
you do not depress the brake
pedal, the warning will be illuminat-
ed.
5.When you shift into [P], if the vehi-
cle speed is high, warning will be
illuminated. Stop the vehicle at
safe area and shift into [P].
6.When the transmission is fixed on
[M], the warning will be illuminated.
OVIEDR2902 OVIEDR2903 OVIEDR2904
Driving your vehicle
205
7.While stopping in [D], [R] and [M],
when you get off the vehicle, the
warning will be illuminated for your
safety and the shifting is automati-
cally changed to [P].
If you do not press [UNLOCK] but-
ton, the warning will be illuminated.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Be sure the car is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave
the car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
OVIEDR2905 OVIEDR2910
521
Driving your vehicle
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the trans-
mission in P (Park) to keep the car
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a colli-
sion, an unbelted occupant is
significantly more likely to be
seriously injured or killed than
a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
oversteers to reenter the road-
way.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
Driving your vehicle
225
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive)
or [1st] gear of [M] mode. Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade,
and release the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator gradually
while releasing the service brakes.
523
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
To dry the brakes, apply them
lightly while maintaining a
safe forward speed until brake
performance returns to nor-
mal.
• Always, confirm the position
of the brake and accelerator
pedal before driving. If you
don't check the position of the
accelerator and brake pedal
before driving, you may
depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Continuous
brake application will cause
the brakes to overheat and
could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle’s ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
245
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs serv-
ice. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually
lose braking performance,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs,
do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle
sets.
525
Driving your vehicle
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may
be a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem. Immediate attention is neces-
sary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely
positioned in P (Park) for
automatic transmission
equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
WK-23_TF
Driving your vehicle
265
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the brake pedal and then pull
the EPB switch. Make sure that the
brake warning light comes on.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the
following condition:
• Set the engine start/stop button in
the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
To release EPB (electric parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Rear), N (Neutral) or D
(Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Depress the accelerator pedal sat-
isfying the following conditions.
1. Engine running
2. Driver's seat belt fastened
3. Driver's door, engine hood and
trunk closed
4. Shift lever in R (Rear), D (Drive)
or M (Mode)
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation. It could damage the
vehicle system and make
endanger driving safety.
OVI053109
OVI053110
527
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the engine
start/stop button is in the OFF
position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, press the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with EPB switch
when you drive downhill or back
up the vehicle.
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
• The engine is turned off with the
EPB applied
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but doesn't release auto-
matically, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and the engine hood in [D]
gear or trunk in [R] gear is opened,
a warning will sound and a mes-
sage will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs,
depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
CAUTION
• If the parking brake warning
light is still on even though
the EPB has been released,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and
brake rotor wear.
OVIEDR2912
Driving your vehicle
285
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is turned to
the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the igni-
tion switch or the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake and make sure the shift
lever is securely positioned in
P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the EPB switch. If the
EPB is released unintentional-
ly, serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehcile which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
CAUTION
• A click sound may be heard
while operating or releasing
the EPB. These conditions are
normal and indicate that the
EPB is functioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her
how to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if
you drive with the EPB
applied.
• When you automatically
release EPB by depressing
the accelerator pedal, depress
it slowly.
OVI053111
■ Type A
■ Type B
529
Driving your vehicle
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling the EPB
switch. Braking is possible only when
you pull the EPB switch.
✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
(Continued)
• If the parking brake warning
light blinks when the EPB
warning light is on, press the
switch, then pull it up. Once
more press it back to its origi-
nal position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does
not go off, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
• The EPB warning light may
illuminate if the EPB switch
operates abnormally. Shut the
engine off and turn it on again
after a few minutes. The warn-
ing light will go off and the
EPB switch will operate nor-
mally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, we
recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the parking brake warning
light does not illuminate or
blinks even though the EPB
switch was pulled up, the EPB
is not applied.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is mov-
ing except in an emergency sit-
uation.
Driving your vehicle
305
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by
loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow
truck and have the system checked.
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driv-
er brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal in
[D], [R], [N] or [Manual Mode] gear.
Set up
1.With the driver's door, engine hood
and trunk closed, fasten the dri-
ver's seat belt or depress the brake
pedal and then press the Auto Hold
button. The white AUTO HOLD
indicator will come on and the sys-
tem will be in the standby position.
2.When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from white to green.
3.The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
CAUTION
If you continuously notice a
noise or burning smell when the
EPB is used for emergency
braking, we recommend that the
system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OVI053112L
OVI053113
531
Driving your vehicle
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or manual mode, the Auto
Hold will be released automatically
and the vehicle will start to move.
The indicator changes from green to
white.
If you want to release it manually, pull
the EPB switch while depressing the
brake pedal. The AUTO HOLD indi-
cator changes from green to white
and the system changes to the
standby position.
For your safety, release the AUTO
HOLD operation manually if the vehi-
cle ahead is too close.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
✽
NOTICE
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB in
such cases:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened in [D]
gear
- The trunk is opened in [R] gear
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged.
(Continued)
WARNING
When driving off from Auto
Hold by depressing the acceler-
ator pedal, always check the
surrounding area near your
vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth launch.
CAUTION
For your safety, cancel the Auto
Hold operation when:
• Driving downhill.
• Driving slowly, parking, or
backing up.
• Washing the vehicle in an
automatic car wash.
Driving your vehicle
325
(Continued)
Before driving off again, press foot
brake pedal, check the surround-
ing area near your vehicle and
release parking brake manually
with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. We recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, the notice will illuminate on the
LCD display. Also warning chime
sounds once.
CAUTION
If there is a malfunction with the
driver’s door, hood or trunk
open detection system, the
AUTO HOLD may not work prop-
erly.
We recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OVIEDR2914
533
Driving your vehicle
If it is impossible to apply EPB from
Auto Hold, the notice will illuminate
on the LCD display. Also warning
chime sounds once. In that time,
apply the brake pedal.
If you did not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch,
the notice will illuminate on the LCD
display. Also warning chime sounds
once.
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver door, engine
hood and trunk are not closed or the
driver seat belt is not fastened, the
notice will illuminate on the LCD dis-
play. Also warning chime sounds
once. In that time, press the [AUTO
HOLD] button after closing the driver
door, engine hood and trunk and fas-
tening the seat belt.
OVIEDR2915 OVIEDR2916
CAUTION
If this notice illuminates, the
Auto Hold and EPB may not be
operated. For your safety, apply
the brake pedal.
OVIEDR2913
Driving your vehicle
345
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allow the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent
accidents due to improper or
dangerous driving maneuvers.
Even though vehicle control is
improved during emergency
braking, always maintain a safe
distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced dur-
ing extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock brak-
ing system (or Electronic
Stability Control) may be longer
than for those without it in the
following road conditions.
During these conditions the
vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
• With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
The safety features of an ABS
(or ESC) equipped vehicle
should not be tested by high
speed driving or cornering. This
could endanger the safety of
yourself or others.
535
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. In this
case, however, your regular
brakes will work normally.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The ABS warning light will
stay on for approximately 3
seconds after the ignition
switch is ON. During that time,
the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your
ABS. Contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
Driving your vehicle
365
✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) (If equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road hav-
ing poor traction, such as an
icy road, and have operated
your brakes continuously, the
ABS will be active continuous-
ly and the ABS warning light
may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
OVI053021
537
Driving your vehicle
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
tain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors includ-
ing speed, road conditions and driv-
er steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in pre-
venting a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is func-
tioning properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast according
to the road conditions or too
quickly when cornering.
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious acci-
dents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by
avoiding maneuvers that cause
the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always
follow all the normal precau-
tions for driving - including driv-
ing at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
Driving your vehicle
385
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate
for approximately 3 sec-
onds, then ESC is turned
on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and
does not indicate a prob-
lem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolution per
minute) may not be
increased even if you
press the accelerator
pedal deeply. This is to
maintain the stability and
traction of the vehicle and
does not indicate a prob-
lem.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
-
539
Driving your vehicle
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the indicator light illumi-
nates, then goes off if the ESC sys-
tem is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when the ESC is turned off with the
button.
OVIEDR2918 OVIEDR2917
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
Driving your vehicle
405
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated and the buzzer beeps)
by pressing the button for 3 sec-
onds. If the ESC is left on, it may
prevent the vehicle speed from
increasing, and result in false diag-
nosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your origi-
nal tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control
is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved,
snowy, or icy roads. Drive slow-
ly and don’t attempt to acceler-
ate whenever the ESC indicator
light is blinking, or when the
road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
CAUTION
Even if you cancel the ESC
function by pressing the button,
the ESC function may be operat-
ed. It is normal condition for
safety driving.
541
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from slipping back by operat-
ing the brakes automatically for
about 2 seconds. The brakes are
released when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or after about 2 sec-
onds.
✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
(if equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking
the stop light when the vehicle is
braked rapidly and severely.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops (vehi-
cle speed is over 55km/h and the
vehicle deceleration at greater
than 7 m/s
2
)
• The ABS is activating
When the vehicle speed is under 40
km/h and the ABS deactivates or the
sudden stop situation is over, the
stop light blinking will stop. Instead,
the hazard warning flasher will turn
on automatically.
The hazard warning flasher will turn
off when vehicle speed is over
10km/h after the vehicle has
stopped. Also, it will turn off when the
vehicle is driven at low speed for
some time. You can turn it off manu-
ally by pushing the hazard warning
flasher switch.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for
about 2 seconds, so when the
vehicle is starting off always
depress the accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
425
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the park-
ing brake indicator light is out
before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your car
will not stop as quickly if the brakes
are wet. Wet brakes may cause the
vehicle to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the car under control at all
times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal
(ESS) system will not work if the
hazard warning flasher is
already on.
WARNING
• Whenever leaving vehicle or
parking, always set the park-
ing brake and fully engage the
vehicle's transmission into
the P (Park) position. Vehicles
not fully engaged in park with
the parking brake set are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and injuring yourself or oth-
ers.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
543
Driving your vehicle
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the car in gear
at all times, use the brakes to slow
down, then shift to a lower gear so
that engine braking will help you
maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because it can result in the
brakes overheating and losing their
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the car pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission, don't let
your car creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
car is stopped.
• Be caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P. If your
vehicle is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels into the curb to help
keep the vehicle from rolling. If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P and block
the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal. This can cause the trans-
mission to overheat. Always use
the brake pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
445
DRIVE mode / SNOW mode
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The system initializes to the NOR-
MAL mode when the engine
start/stop button is turned off and on.
It is displayed on the AVN monitor
which mode the vehicle is in as
below.
• SPORT
• SNOW (if equipped)
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
* If you turn off the User Settings
Mode, the ECO indicator is not dis-
played.
* According to the User Settings
Mode, the background changes.
You can turn off the background in
User Settings Mode.
ECO mode
The ECO indicator is a
system that helps guide
you to drive economically
when you have NORMAL
MODE selected.
• The ECO indicator changes color
from white to green when you are
driving the best for economy.
• Maximize your economy by adjust
your driving habit to be less
aggressive and get the most time
spent with green ECO indication.
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
NORMAL
SNOW SPORT
ECO
OVI053115L
545
Driving your vehicle
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on dynamic
driving by automatically controlling
the steering wheel, engine and
transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT
indicator will illuminate.
• If the SPORT mode is activated,
and the engine start/stop button is
turned off and on DRIVE MODE
would be changed to NORMAL
mode. To turn on the SPORT mode
press DRIVE MODE button again.
• If the system is activated:
- Deceleration from release of
accelerator pedal will result in less
rapid fall in RPM (revolutions per
minute) than in the NORMAL
mode.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽
NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
✽
NOTICE
If you activate the Driving Mode
Theme on the User Settings Mode of
the LCD display (if equipped), the
SPORT and SNOW indicators will
not turn on the instrument cluster.
SNOW mode (if equipped)
Snow mode helps the driver to drive
more effectively on slippery roads
such as snowy or muddy roads.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the SNOW mode is
selected, the SNOW
indicator will illuminate.
SPORT
SNOW
Driving your vehicle
465
ECS controls the vehicle suspension
automatically to maximize passenger
comfort by using the air spring in the
suspension.
You can also control the vehicle sus-
pension manually in NORMAL mode
or HIGH mode.
To control the vehicle height
• Push the vehicle height control but-
ton to select the HIGH mode that
makes the vehicle height be higher
than the NORMAL mode and the
indicator light on the vehicle height
control button will illuminate. It is
useful in a rough road.
• Push the vehicle height control but-
ton again to select the NORMAL
mode that makes the vehicle
height lower than the HIGH mode.
The indicator light in the vehicle
height control button will go off.
• When the vehicle stops with the
shift lever in P(Park) or N(Neutral),
you may change the vehicle height.
• When you drive under 70km/h, you
may select the HIGH mode.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds
70km/h while driving in the HIGH
mode, the NORMAL mode will be
selected automatically.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds
120km/h while driving in NORMAL
mode, the LOW mode that is lower
than NORMAL mode will be select-
ed automatically. LOW mode can
not be selected manually.
• When you drive under 80km/h in
the LOW mode, the NORMAL
mode will be selected automatical-
ly.
• When the engine start/stop button
is turned off with the HIGH mode
selected, the HIGH mode will be
maintained.
It is to prevent damage under the
vehicle when parked in rough
roads.
• The height of the vehicle may be
adjusted after the engine start/stop
button is turned off for 2 hours/
5 hours/10 hours.
It is to compensate vehicle height
affected by outside temperature.
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED SUSPENSION (ECS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI053116
547
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• When you drive over 70km/h, you
may not select the HIGH mode.
• Do not operate ECS when the air
filter of the compressor in the
lower part of the vehicle sinks
under the water.
In draft of water into the compres-
sor may happen, and ECS may not
operate normally.
ECS (electronic controlled
suspension) malfunction
warning message
If ECS malfunction warning message
comes on while driving, ECS is not
working properly.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽
NOTICE
• Make sure there are no objects
under the vehicle before changing
the vehicle height.
• A click sound may be heard while
operating ECS, but these condi-
tions are normal and indicate that
ECS is functioning properly.
• Depending on the outside temper-
ature the vehicle height may be
different.
• When the vehicle is parked with
one side of the vehicle lifted or
vehicle speed is suddenly acceler-
ated/decelerated or the steering
wheel is suddenly turned, the
height may not temporarily be
adjusted. This is to protect the sys-
tem.
• When one side of the vehicle was
lifted with a jack, the height may
not temporarily be adjusted. The
ECS will operate normally when
the engine is turned on again or
when the vehicle is accelerated.
• When the vehicle is not driven for
a long period of time, vehicle
height may get low. The ECS will
operate normally when the engine
is turned on.
OVIEDI3953
Driving your vehicle
485
✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is discharged, the
ECS malfunction warning mes-
sage may turn on to protect the
system.
• When the height is adjusted
repeatedly, the height may not
temporarily be adjusted for the
compressor overheats. This is to
prevent damage to related parts.
Towing your vehicle
OVI059025N
CAUTION
If the ECS malfunction message
illuminates when there is no air
in the suspension, the vehicle
height will be very low, so do
not drive to protect the vehicle
from the projections on the sur-
face of the ground. We recom-
mend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.You should tow
the vehicle as the picture.
549
Driving your vehicle
OVI059026
CAUTION
When you load the vehicle onto
the tow truck, the loading
angle(1) should be smaller than
6°.
Driving your vehicle
505
➀ CRUISE indicator
➁ SET indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without pressing the
accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (25
mph) and below approximately 180
km/h (113 mph).
✽
NOTICE
During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminat-
ed) the cruise control can be
activated unintentionally.
Keep the cruise control sys-
tem off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise
control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to
keep the vehicle at a constant
speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-
covered) or winding roads or
over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control sys-
tem.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Be careful when driving
downhill using the cruise con-
trol system, which may
increase the vehicle speed.
OVI053117
551
Driving your vehicle
Cruise control speed
To set cruise control speed:
1.Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(25 mph) and less than 180 km/h
(113 mph).
3.Push the SET- switch, and release
it at the desired speed. The SET
indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate. Release the
accelerator pedal. The desired
speed will automatically be main-
tained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES+ switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch at the speed
you want.
• Push the RES+ switch and release
it immediately. The cruising speed
will increase by 2.0 km/h (1.2 mph)
or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
the RES+ switch is operated in this
manner.
• You can set the speed to 180 km/h
(113 mph).
OVI054029L
OVI054030LOVI054028L
Driving your vehicle
525
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET- switch and hold it.
Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the switch at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Push the SET- switch and release
it immediately. The cruising speed
will decrease by 2.0 km/h (1.2
mph) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each
time the SET- switch is operated in
this manner.
• You can set the speed to 40 km/h
(25 mph).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch at
increased speed, the cruising speed
will be set again.
Cruise control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Shifting the shift lever into N
(Neutral).
• Pulling the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decreasing the vehicle speed
lower than the memory speed by
15 km/h (9 mph).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 32 km/h
(20 mph).
• Increasing the vehicle speed to
more than approximately 200 km/h
(125 mph).
OVI054031L
OVI054029L
553
Driving your vehicle
• The ESC is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with
sports mode.
• Operate the EPB switch. Do not
operate the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency sit-
uation.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
RES+ switch located on your steer-
ing wheel. You will return to your pre-
viously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph):
If any method other than the
CRUISE switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when the
RES+ switch is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when pressing the RES+ switch to
resume the speed.
OVI054030L
Driving your vehicle
545
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the engine start/stop button
off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume the cruise control opera-
tion, repeat the steps provided in “To
set cruise control speed” on the pre-
vious page.
OVI054028L
555
Driving your vehicle
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ SET indicator
➂ Set speed
➃ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The smart cruise control system
allows you to program the vehicle to
maintain constant speed and dis-
tance detecting the vehicle ahead
without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the smart cruise control is
left on, (cruise indicator light
in the instrument cluster illu-
minated) the smart cruise
control can be activated unin-
tentionally. Keep the smart
cruise control system off
(cruise indicator light off)
when the smart cruise control
is not used.
• Use the smart cruise control
system only when traveling
on open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the smart cruise
control when it may not be
safe to keep the car at a con-
stant speed. For instance,
driving in heavy or varying
traffic, or on slippery (rainy,
icy or snow-covered) or wind-
ing roads or steep hills.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the smart cruise control
system.
(Continued)
WARNING
For your safety, please read the
owner's manual before using
the smart cruise control sys-
tem.
OVI053117
OVIDDR2913L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
565
Smart cruise control speed
To set cruise control speed:
1.Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed.
The smart cruise control speed
can be set as follows:
• 30 km/h (18.6 mph) ~180 km/h
(113 mph) : when there is no
vehicle in front
• 0 km/h (0 mph) ~180 km/h (113
mph) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3.Push the SET- switch, and release
it at the desired speed. The SET
indicator light, set speed and vehi-
cle to vehicle distance on the LCD
screen will illuminate.
4.Release the accelerator pedal. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
(Continued)
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem is not a substitute for safe
driving. It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check
the speed and distance of the
vehicle ahead.
OVI053028N
OVI053029N
557
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES+ switch and hold it.
Your vehicle set speed will
increase by 10 km/h or 5 mph.
Release the switch at the speed
you want.
• Push the RES+ switch and release
it immediately. The cruising speed
will increase by 1.0 km/h (0.6 mph)
or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
the RES+ switch is operated in this
manner.
• You can set the speed to 180 km/h
(113 mph).
To decrease the crusie control
set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the SET- switch and hold it.
Your vehicle set speed will
decrease by 10 km/h or 5 mph.
Release the switch at the speed
you want.
• Push the SET- switch and release
it immediately. The cruising speed
will decrease by 1.0 km/h (0.6
mph) or 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each
time the SET- switch is operated in
this manner.
• You can set the speed to 30 km/h
(18.6 mph).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you press the SET- switch at an
increased speed, the cruising speed
will be set again.
✽
NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not
controlled automatically at this
time even if there is a vehicle in front
of you.
OVI053030N OVI053029N
Driving your vehicle
585
Smart Cruise control will be tem-
porarily canceled when:
Cancelled manually
• While driving
- The brake pedal is depressed.
- Pull the lever (to CANCEL) locat-
ed on the steering wheel.
• While stopping with operating sys-
tem
- Depress the brake pedal and pull
the lever (to CANCEL)
The advanced smart cruise control
turns off temporarily when the indica-
tor on the LCD display turns off.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).
• The EPB (electric parking brake) is
applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 190
km/h (120 mph).
• The vehicle stops on a steep
incline.
• The ESC, ABS or TCS is operat-
ing.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matters.
• When the vehicle is stopped for
over 5 minutes.
• The vehicle stops and go repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
• The driver starts driving by
depressing the accelerator pedal
or pressing the RES+ button, if a
vehicle stops far away ahead of
your vehicle.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than 1
minute.
Each of these actions will cancel
the smart cruise control operation.
(the SET indicator, set speed and
vehicle to vehicle distance on the
LCD display will go off.)
In a condition the smart cruise con-
trol is cancelled automatically, the
smart cruise control will not
resume even though the RES+ or
SET- button is pressed. Also, the
EPB (electric parking brake) will be
applied when the vehicle is
stopped.
OVI053031N
CAUTION
If the smart cruise control is
cancelled by other than the rea-
sons mentioned, we recom-
mend have the system checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
559
Driving your vehicle
If the system is cancelled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the
CRUISE switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when the
RES+ switch is pushed. It will not
resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approxi-
mately 10 km/h (6.2 mph) when the
sensor detects the vehicle ahead or
if the vehicle speed has dropped
below approximately 30 km/h (18.6
mph) when there is no vehicle in
front of your vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when pressing the RES+ switch to
resume speed.
OVIEDR2920
OVI053030N
Driving your vehicle
605
To turn cruise control off:
• While driving
- Push the CRUISE button
• While stopping with operating sys-
tem
- Depress the brake pedal and
push the CRUISE button
Both of these actions cancel smart
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume smart cruise control oper-
ation, repeat the steps provided in
“To set cruise control speed” on the
previous page.
Smart cruise control vehicle to
vehicle distance
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program
the vehicle to maintain relative dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead without
depressing the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will
automatically activate when the
smart cruise control system is on.
Select the appropriate distance
according to road conditions and
vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pulled, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 90 km/h
(56 mph), the distance maintain as
follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 52 m
Distance 3 - approximately 40 m
Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m
Distance 1 - approximately 25 m
✽
NOTICE
The 'Distance 4' is always set when
the system is used for the first time
after starting the engine.
OVI053028N
OVI053118N
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
561
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle will maintain the set
speed, when the lane ahead is
clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or
speed up to maintain the selected
distance, when there is a vehicle
ahead of you in the lane. (A vehicle
will appear in front of your vehicle
in the LCD display only when there
is an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the selected speed.
CAUTION
• The warning chime sounds
and malfunction indicator
blinks if it is hard to maintain
the selected distance to the
vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle
speed by depressing the
brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
OVIDDR2911/OVI053126
OVIDDR2913/OVIDDR2912
Driving your vehicle
625
In traffic situation
In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts mov-
ing, your vehicle will start as well.
However, if the vehicle stops for
more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
push the RES+ switch to start driv-
ing.
Distance to distance vehicle
sensor
The sensor detects the distance to
the vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the area in front of the
sensor clean.
CAUTION
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 30km/h (18.6
mph)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driv-
ing condition.
OVIEDR2921
OVIEDR2922
OVI053058
563
Driving your vehicle
SCC (Smart cruise control) mal-
function indicator
The warning message/
indicator illuminates
when the vehicle to
vehicle distance control
system is not function-
ing normally.
We recommend that the
system be checked by
an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
To convert to cruise control
mode:
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
CAUTION
• Do not install accessories
around the sensor and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
sensor performance.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
• Do not damage the sensor or
sensor area by a strong
impact. If the sensor moves
slightly off position, the smart
cruise control system will not
operate correctly.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
• We recommend that the sen-
sor be replaced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. Do not
paint anything on the sensor
cover.
OVIEDR2923
OVIEDR2925
Driving your vehicle
645
1.Turn the smart cruise control sys-
tem on (the cruise indicator light
will be on but the system will not be
activated).
2.Pull the distance to distance switch
for more than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between "Smart cruise
control(SCC) mode" and "Cruise
control(CC) mode".
Limitations of the system
The smart cruise control system may
have limits to its ability to detect dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead due to
road and traffic conditions.
On curves
• On curves, the smart cruise control
system may not detect a moving
vehicle in your lane, and then your
vehicle could accelerate to the set
speed. Also, the vehicle speed will
rapidly down when the vehicle
ahead is recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
WARNING
When using the cruise control
mode, you must manually
access the distance to other
vehicles as the system will not
automatically brake to slow
down for other vehicles.
OBH058029
565
Driving your vehicle
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent
lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. Apply
the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check
to be sure that the road conditions
permit safe operation of the smart
cruise control.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the smart cruise control system
may not detect a moving vehicle in
your lane, and cause your vehicle
to accelerate to the set speed.
Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly
down when the vehicle ahead is
recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect imme-
diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is slower than your vehicle,
your speed may decrease to main-
tain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
OBH058053
OBH058030
OBH058045
Driving your vehicle
665
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle, you
may accelerate if that vehicle is
traveling less than your set speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane
cannot be recognized by the sensor
as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
OHG050074
OBH058046
567
Driving your vehicle
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
OHG050075 OHG050076
Driving your vehicle
685
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out to the
back of the vehicle.
OHG050077
WARNING
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot guarantee the
stop for every emergency sit-
uation.
If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during a high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When other vehicles are
changing lanes in front of you
frequently, the smart cruise
control system may not oper-
ate appropriately. Always look
ahead cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situa-
tions from occurring.
• The smart cruise control sys-
tem is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a con-
venience function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed
and the distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
• Always be aware of the select-
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
(Continued)
569
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
The smart cruise control system
may not operate temporarily
due to electrical interference.
(Continued)
• As the smart cruise control
system may not recognize
complex driving situations,
always pay attention to driv-
ing conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
• For safe operation, carefully
read and follow the instruc-
tions in this manual before
use.
Driving your vehicle
705
This system detects the lane with the
sensor at the front windshield and
warns you when your vehicle leaves
the lane.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI059012
OVI053013
WARNING
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the
driver's responsibility to
always check the road condi-
tions.
• Do not turn the steering wheel
suddenly, when the LDWS
warns you that your vehicle is
leaving the lane.
• If the sensor can not detect
the lane or if the vehicle speed
does not exceed 60km/h, the
LDWS won't warn you even
though vehicle leaves the
lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating on
the front windshield, the
LDWS may not work properly.
• Do not let water or any kind of
liquid come in contact with
the LDWS sensor.
• Do not remove the LDWS
parts and do not affect the
sensor by a strong impact.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not put objects that reflect
light on the dash board.
• Always check the road condi-
tions because you may not
hear the warning chime
because of audio, and exter-
nal conditions.
571
Driving your vehicle
LDWS operation
To operate the LDWS, pull
the switch with the engine
start/stop button in the
ON position. The indicator
(green) illuminates on the
cluster. To cancel the
LDWS, pull the switch
again.
LDWS indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] - When the system operat-
ing conditions are satisfied.
• [White]
- When system operating condi-
tions are not satisfied (When the
vehicle speed is below 60 km/h).
- When the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Yellow] - When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system. In this case, we recom-
mend that the vehicle be inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If your vehicle leaves the lane when
the LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 60km/h, the warning
operates as follows:
OVIDDR2919
OVIDDR2920
• When the sensor detects the lane line
• When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
Driving your vehicle
725
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low.
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
3. Haptic warning (if equipped with
pre-safe seat belt)
If you leave the lane for about 3 sec-
onds, the pre-safe seat belt provides
haptic warning.
You can turn off the haptic warning in
User Settings Mode.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
to change lane.
But, when the hazard warning
flasher is operating, the LDWS
operates normally.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽
NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn sig-
nal switch then change the lane.
OVI059063OVIDDR2922/OVIDDR2921
Left Right
573
Driving your vehicle
DRIVER'S ATTENTION
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or many other
things.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as passing
through a tunnel.
• Not turning on the headlight or
the light is weak even at night or in
a tunnel.
• Difficult to distinguish the color of
the lane marker from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light reflects from the water on
the road such as sunlight, street-
light or the light of oncoming vehi-
cles.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matters.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to direct light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane marker is damaged or
indistinct.
• The shadow is on the lane marker
by a median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
marker.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane marker.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane marker are
crossing complicatedly.
• Placing something on the dash-
board.
• Driving with the sun in front of
you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane marker is more than two.
• The lane marker in a tunnel is
hard to distinguish due to dust or
grease.
• The lane marker is hard to distin-
guish after raining at night.
• The lane marker is hard to distin-
guish due to dust.
Driving your vehicle
745
For your safety, the intelligent accel-
erator pedal operates as follows:
The reactive force of the accelerator
pedal increases when the fuel effi-
ciency is low.
The intelligent accelerator pedal
function is available for use in vehi-
cles equipped with drive mode inte-
grated control system and ECO driv-
ing mode.
The intelligent accelerator pedal is
related with AVSM (Advanced vehi-
cle safety management) and ECO
driving.
To cancel this system, cancel all sys-
tem in User Settings Mode.
• AVSM : refer to the User Settings
Mode in chapter 4.
• ECO driving : refer to the User
Settings Mode in
chapter 4.
INTELLIGENT ACCELERATOR PEDAL (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Do not be surprised when the
pedal occurs reactive force. It's
not a malfunction but a warning
for your safety.
575
Driving your vehicle
AVSM detects the distance from the
vehicle ahead with the sensor, to
warn you before collision and protect
you in certain hazardous situations
by using warning message, warning
sound and seat belt vibration (if
equipped).
• If the AVSM senses the object
ahead too near the vehicle and if
driver's operating of the brake
pedal or the steering wheel should
be needed, the warning light illumi-
nates.
Immediately reduce your speed.
• If the AVSM senses more danger-
ous, the warning sound also oper-
ates and the seat belt vibrates.
Immediately reduce your speed.
ADVANCED VEHICLE SAFETY MANAGEMENT (AVSM) (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Always check the road condi-
tions to prevent danger even if
the warning light does not illu-
minate, the warning sound does
not operate or the seat belt does
not vibrate.
OVIEDR29101
Driving your vehicle
765
Brake operating
• If the AVSM senses the collision,
the brake system comes to stan-
dard mode to react promptly when
the driver operates the brake
pedal.
• If the driver releases the accelera-
tor after warning in hazardous situ-
ations, the AVSM automatically
brakes the vehicle gently.
• If the driver hits the brake to reduce
vehicle speed, the brake assistant
system operates to raise efficiency
of braking.
• If danger disappears, if the driver
depresses the accelerator or if the
driver releases the brake pedal,
the brake operating stop.
Seat belt operating
The seat belt tightens when the vehi-
cle senses a collision.
WARNING
The AVSM does not stop the
vehicle completely and does
not avoid collision. Always look
ahead cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situa-
tions from occurring.
WARNING
The AVSM operates according
to the distance from the vehicle
ahead, relative velocity and dri-
ver's operation of the brake or
accelerator pedal. Do not drive
dangerously to operate the
AVSM.
CAUTION
• When the AVSM is controlled
or turned off, make sure that
the vehicle is stopped.
• When the engine is running by
turning on, the AVSM is auto-
matically turned on. If is not
required, select the AVSM OFF
in USM.
• If the AVSM ON is selected in
USM (User Settings Mode), if
the ESC is cancelled by press-
ing the ESC OFF button, the
AVSM function is automatical-
ly cancelled. And then it is
impossible to control the
AVSM by manually.
577
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
• The VSM OFF indicator will illumi-
nate when the engine start/stop
button is turned ON, but should go
off after approximately 3 seconds.
If the indicator does not come on,
or continuously remains on after
coming on for about 3 seconds
when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion, or if the indicator comes on
while driving, the AVSM is not
working properly. We recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The VSM OFF indicator may illumi-
nate when the ESC indicator or
SCC indicator comes on, but it
does not indicate malfunction of
the AVSM.
WARNING
The AVSM is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
WARNING
• Even if there is a malfunction
to the brake operating of the
AVSM, when you depress the
brake pedal, the brake is oper-
ating normally. But, the AVSM
brake operating does not
operate even in certain haz-
ardous situations.
• The AVSM is designed to
function above approximately
15 km/h (9.3 mph) and below
approximately 180 km/h (111.8
mph).
• The AVSM does not react to
- Persons or animals.
- Oncoming vehicles in the
opposite lane or the vehicle
in the intersection.
- Stopped objects.
• The AVSM can not detect the
objects certainly, when:
- The sensors are stained with
dirt or covered.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- There is heavy rain or heavy
snow.
- There is interference by elec-
tromagnetic waves.
- There are strong radar
reflections.
- Driving in curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- Driving in areas under con-
struction.
- The object ahead is very nar-
row such as motorcycles or
bicycles.
- The vehicle cuts in suddenly.
• The AVSM brake operating
does not operates, if the driv-
er does not release the accel-
erator pedal or does not oper-
ate the brake pedal.
Driving your vehicle
785
The BSD (Blind spot detection) sys-
tem uses a radar sensor to alert the
driver while driving.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides information to
the driver.
➀ BSD(Blind spot detection)
Warning range is dependent on your
vehicle speed. However, if your vehi-
cle speed is speedy about 10km/h
than other vehicle, the warning is not
operated.
➁ LCA(Lane change assist)
When the vehicle is approaching to
your vehicle at high speed, the warn-
ing is operated.
➂ RCTA(Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves backward,
the sensor detects the approaching
vehicles to the left or right side direc-
tion and warning is operated.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI053119
OVI053129L
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even
though the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system is operat-
ing.
• BSD (Blind spot detection)
system is a system made for
convenience. Do not solely
rely on the system but always
pay attention to drive safely.
579
Driving your vehicle
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system switch is pressed
with the ignition switch ON. If vehicle
speed exceeds 15 km/h (9.3 mph),
the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above 15 km/h
(9.3 mph)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror and the head up dis-
play.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will be
turned off by driving conditions.
OVI053120
1st stage
Driving your vehicle
805
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will be blinking
on the outside rearview mirror and
the head up display, and a alarm will
sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
origin position, the second stage
alert will be deactivated.
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located on inside of
the rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OVI053121
OVI053122
2nd stage
OVI053130
581
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
If the detecting sensor's ability is low
or overheated by foreign substances
on the rear bumper, the message will
appear to notify the driver. (In heavy
rain area or large area that has no
detected vehicle. In this time, check
the rear bumper. If the system does
not activate normally after removing
the substances on the rear bumper,
we recommend that you visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear cross traffic alert
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information driver.
Operating conditions
• When the ignition is ON, if you
press the BSD switch, the switch
indicator illuminates and the sys-
tem is on ready.
• The system is operated when the
vehicle speed is below 10km/h with
R gear.
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is
0.5m~20m based on side direc-
tion. If the approaching vehicle
speed is 4 km/h~36 km/h in sens-
ing range, it is detected. However,
the system sensing range is differ-
ent base on conditions. Always pay
attention to surrounding.
OVIEDI3947N OVI053131
Driving your vehicle
825
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing is chime and the warning light
will blink on the outside rearview
mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is got out
from sensing range, behind your
vehicle, moving opposite direction
away from your vehicle or moving
slow, the warning is cancelled.
• The system operating is not work-
ing properly due to other factors or
circumstances, always pay atten-
tion to your surrounding.
❈ If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be deteriorated.
OVI053132
WARNING
• The warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror and the
head up display will illuminate
whenever a vehicle is detect-
ed at the rear side by the sys-
tem.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
BSD (Blind spot detection)
system. Do not solely rely on
the system but check for your-
self before changing lanes.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surround-
ings while driving.
CAUTION
• The system may not work
properly if the bumper has
been replaced or if a repair
work has been done near the
sensor.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width.
If the road is narrow the sys-
tem may detect other vehicles
in the next lane.
• On the contrary, if the road is
very wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
583
Driving your vehicle
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle shows
much change such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A lot of amount of metal sub-
stances are near the vehicles such
as a construction area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer like vehicle is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to it
and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of rear
bumper is high
- When the sensors are covered by
the vehicle, wall and pillar of park-
ing lot
- When your vehicle moves back, if
the detected vehicle also moves
back
- If there is small things like shopping
cart and baby carriage
- If there is low height vehicle like
sport vehicle
- When the vehicle is closing to your
vehicle
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is severely polluted
- The window is severely polluted
- The windows are severely tinted.
Driving your vehicle
845
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
that of the other traffic so you don't
have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe
distance from other vehicles so
you can avoid unnecessary brak-
ing. This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
car uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition.
For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your car in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in sec-
tion 7. If you drive your car in
severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 7 for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be
kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your car. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
585
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting in the engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, we rec-
ommend that the system be serviced
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Engine off
during
motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. Instead,
keep the engine on and down-
shift to an appropriate gear for
engine braking effect. In addi-
tion, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
Driving your vehicle
865
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in brak-
ing or steering.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
drive wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission. Do
not race the engine, and spin the
wheels as little as possible. If you are
still stuck after a few tries, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transmission.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
OVI053043
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on
a vehicle equipped with ABS.
WARNING
- Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission, while driving on
slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transmis-
sion damage or failure, and tire
damage.
587
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
WARNING - Spinning
tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
OVI059044L
Driving your vehicle
885
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
OVI053046NOVI059045
589
Driving your vehicle
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the
tires.
OVI023001
Driving your vehicle
905
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and
sudden tire failure leading to
accidents, injuries, and even
death. Always check tires for
proper inflation before driv-
ing. For proper tire pressures,
refer to “Tires and wheels” in
section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is danger-
ous. Worn-out tires can result
in loss of vehicle control, col-
lisions, injury, and even death.
Worn-out tires should be
replaced as soon as possible
and should never be used for
driving. Always check the tire
tread before driving your car.
For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
591
Driving your vehicle
More severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize winter
driving problem, you should follow
these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid
acceleration, sudden brake applica-
tions, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front and your vehicle. Also, apply
the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire
will provide a greater driving force,
but will not prevent side skids.
✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all coun-
tries. Check the country laws before
fitting tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire
size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
OVI053049N
Driving your vehicle
925
245/50R18 Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
12 mm (0.47 in). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the rear
tires.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains
are the correct size and type
for your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to
the vehicle body and suspen-
sion and may not be covered
by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty. Also, the snow chain
connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting
vehicle components causing
the snow chains to come
loose from the tire. Make sure
the snow chains are SAE
class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installa-
tion for proper mounting after
driving approximately 0.5 to 1
km (0.3 to 0.6 miles) to ensure
safe mounting. Retighten or
remount the chains if they are
loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains,
park the vehicle on level ground
away from traffic. Turn on the
vehicle Hazard Warning flashers
and place a triangular emer-
gency warning device behind
the vehicle if available. Always
place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before
installing snow chains.
OVI059051
593
Driving your vehicle
245/45R19 Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use the
AutoSock (fabric snow chain).
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper snow chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturers
warranty.
Install the AutoSock (fabric snow
chain) only on the rear tires.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20
mph) or the chain manufactur-
er’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Make sure the AutoSock (fab-
ric snow chain) are the correct
size and type for your tires.
Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle
body and suspension and may
not be covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
• Always check the AutoSock
(fabric snow chain) installa-
tion for proper mounting after
driving approximately 0.5 to 1
km (0.3 to 0.6 miles) to ensure
safe mounting. Retighten or
remount the AutoSock (fabric
snow chain) if they are loose.
OVI053136
Driving your vehicle
945
Chain installation
When installing the AutoSock (fabric
snow chain), follow the manufactur-
er's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
the AutoSock (fabric snow chain)
installed. If you hear the AutoSock
(fabric snow chain) contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
AutoSock (fabric snow chain) as
soon as you begin driving on cleared
roads.
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.
CAUTION
• The AutoSock (fabric snow
chain) that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
AutoSock (fabric snow chain)
any time you hear them hitting
the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of the AutoSock (fab-
ric snow chain) may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20
mph) or the AutoSock (fabric
snow chain) manufacturer’s
recommended speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns, and
other road hazards, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting the AutoSock
(fabric snow chain), park the
vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and
place a triangular emergency
warning device behind the vehi-
cle if available. Always place the
vehicle in P (Park), apply the
parking brake and turn off the
engine before installing the
AutoSock (fabric snow chain).
595
Driving your vehicle
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the gear shift lever in P
and block the rear wheels so the
vehicle cannot roll. Then release the
parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
Driving your vehicle
965
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine com-
partment
Placement of foreign objects or
materials which prevent cooling of
the engine, in the engine compart-
ment, may cause a failure or com-
bustion. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
597
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings,
from the vehicle's specifications and
the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s (or front pas-
senger’s) door sill.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle
weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the certification
label attached to the driver's (or
front passenger’s) door.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or damage
the vehicle. You can calculate
the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehi-
cle. Be careful not to overload
your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
985
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-9
• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Low tire pressure position telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
• EC Declaration of conformity for Jack. . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Emergency commodity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Triangle reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Tire pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
engine start/stop button in any posi-
tion. The flasher switch is located in
the center console switch panel. All
turn signal lights will flash simultane-
ously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OVI043086
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the shift lever in P.
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check fuel level.
2.With the engine start/stop button in
the OFF position, check all con-
nectors at the ignition coils and
spark plugs. Reconnect any that
may be disconnected or loose.
3.If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other dam-
age.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
✽
NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the
trunk room, but when you jump
start your vehicle, use the jumper
terminal in the engine room.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
OVI063002
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery. The
battery produces hydrogen
gas which may explode if
exposed to flame or sparks.
If these instructions are not
followed exactly, serious per-
sonal injury and damage to
the vehicle may occur! If you
are not sure how to follow this
procedure, seek qualified
assistance. Automobile bat-
teries contain sulfuric acid.
This is poisonous and highly
corrosive. When jump start-
ing, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid
on yourself, your clothing or
on the vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
✽
NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the
trunk room, but when you jump
start your vehicle, use the jumper
terminal in the engine room.
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the jump start connector (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal on the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to the negative
terminal of the jump start connec-
tor (4). Do not connect it to or near
any part that moves when the
engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
(Continued)
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
67
What to do in an emergency
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, we recommend
that you have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transmission cannot be push-start-
ed.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
CAUTION - Battery
cables
If you jump start the discharged
battery in the trunk compart-
ment, do not connect the
jumper cable from the negative
terminal of the booster battery
to the negative terminal of the
discharged battery. This can
cause the discharged battery to
overheat and crack, releasing
battery acid.
Connect the jumper cable from
the negative terminal of the
booster battery to a solid, sta-
tionary or metallic point away
from the discharged battery.
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P and set
the parking brake. If the air condi-
tioning is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running or
the steaming has stopped. If there
is no visible loss of engine coolant
and no steam, leave the engine
running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight.
If the drive belt seems to be satis-
factory, check for coolant leaking
from the radiator, hoses or under
the vehicle. (If the air conditioning
had been in use, it is normal for
cold water to be draining from it
when you stop).
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, we recommend that you stop
the engine immediately and call
the nearest authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
CAUTION
• Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates there is a leak in the
cooling system and we recom-
mend that the system be
checked as soon as possible
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of
the opening and cause serious
burns.
69
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the TPMS malfunction
indicator remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 1 minute,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intend-
ed.
OVI063031
OVIEDI3943
What to do in an emergency
106
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator does
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON or engine is running.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pres-
sure position
telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The low tire
pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with a
spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replacing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, the below will
happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel.
OKH042081L
611
What to do in an emergency
✽
NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to determine the cause of the
problem.
✽
NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the low tire pressure position
telltale will not be displayed even
though the vehicle has an under-
inflated tire.
WARNING - Low
pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is higher or lower, you should
check the tire inflation pressure
and adjust the tires to the rec-
ommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
What to do in an emergency
126
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or some
separate electronic devices
such as notebook computer,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
613
What to do in an emergency
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replaceing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, the below will
happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel.
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
What to do in an emergency
146
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
❈
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov.
1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle
registrations)
615
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
(4) Tool for removing wheel cover
(if equipped)
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OVI063004
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
WARNING - Changing
tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
166
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by a hand, you can
loosen it easily using the Jack handle.
1. Put the Jack handle (1) into the
inside of tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise by the Jack han-
dle to utilize the principles of the
lever and fulcrum.
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Place the shift lever into P (Park).
3.Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OVI063005
CAUTION
When you remove or store the
spare tire, do not contact or
bump the battery with the spare
tire. Contacting or bumping the
battery may cause failure of
electrical circuits.
OVI063033
617
What to do in an emergency
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6.Insert the tool (1) into the hole and
pull out the wheel cover.
OVI063007
WARNING -
Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in the vehicle that is
being jacked.
OVI063032
CAUTION
When removing the wheel
cover, if you use any other tool
except the tool (1), the wheel
cover may be damaged.
What to do in an emergency
186
7.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
8.Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack at
the designated locations under the
frame. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with two
tabs and a raised dot to index with
the jack.
9.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
WARNING - Jack
location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OVI063010 OBH068012OVI063009
619
What to do in an emergency
10. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the
wheel onto them. If this is diffi-
cult, tip the wheel slightly and get
the top hole in the wheel lined up
with the top stud. Then jiggle the
wheel back and forth until the
wheel can be slid over the other
studs.
11. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
What to do in an emergency
206
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels, we
recommend that you have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the
wheel nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
OVI069011
621
What to do in an emergency
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures
as soon as possible after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
it to the specified pressure, if
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” section 8.
What to do in an emergency
226
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
• Type C
OHYK064001
OHYK064005
OHYK064002
623
What to do in an emergency
JACKDOC14S
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack
What to do in an emergency
246
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the rear wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
rear wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the rear wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the rear of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the front.
✽
NOTICE
When you tow the vehicle as the pic-
ture (A), the cable should be secured
to the vehicle towing hook (1) as the
picture.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angle (2)
must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
OVI069022L
OVI069012
A
B
C
dolly
625
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1.Set the engine start/stop button in
the ACC position.
2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
OVI069014
OVI069013
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
If the ECS malfunction indicator
illuminates when there is no air
in the suspension, the vehicle
height will be very lower, so do
not drive to protect the vehicle
from the projections on the sur-
face of the ground.
We recommend that you take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer by towing the
vehicle and have the system
checked. You should tow the
vehicle as the picture.
OVI059025N
What to do in an emergency
266
When you load the vehicle onto the
tow truck, the loading angle(1)
should be smaller than 6°.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1.Open the trunk, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover by pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front and the rear bumper.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
OVI063016
OVI063017
OVI059026
Front
Rear
627
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
OVI063018
OVI063019
Front
Rear
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
What to do in an emergency
286
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the engine start/stop button
in ACC so the steering wheel isn’t
locked.
• Place the transmission shift lever in
N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing
hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing
cable or chain may break and
cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is
unable to be moved, do not
forcibly continue the towing.
We recommend that you con-
tact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a commercial tow
truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
OVI069020
629
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION - Automatic
transmission
• If the car is being towed with
all four wheels on the ground,
it can be towed only from the
front. Be sure that the trans-
mission is in neutral. Be sure
the steering is unlocked by
placing the ignition switch in
the ACC position. A driver
must be in the towed vehicle
to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transmission,
limit the vehicle speed to 15
km/h (10 mph) and drive less
than 1.5 km (1 mile ) when
towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transmission fluid leak
under your vehicle. If the auto-
matic transmission fluid is
leaking, a flatbed equipment
or towing dolly must be used.
What to do in an emergency
306
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency com-
modities in the vehicle to help you
respond to the emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, take
the following steps carefully.
1.Pull the pin at the top of the extin-
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2.Aim the nozzle toward the base of
the fire.
3.Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze the
handle to discharge the extinguish-
er. If you release the handle, the
discharge will stop.
4.Sweep the nozzle back and forth at
the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch it careful-
ly since it may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scis-
sors, bandage and adhesive tape
and etc. in the kit to give first aid to
an injured person.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the
road to warn oncoming vehicles dur-
ing emergencies, such as when the
vehicle is parked by the roadside due
to any problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-
to-day use, and you may have to add
a few pounds of air periodically and it
is not usually a sign of a leaking tire,
but of normal wear. Always check tire
pressure when the tires are cold
because tire pressure increases with
temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the
following steps;
1.Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the tire.
2.Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will escape
as you begin and more will escape
if you don't press the gauge in firm-
ly.
3.A firm non-leaking push will acti-
vate the gauge.
4.Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to know whether the tire
pressure is low or high.
5.Adjust the tire pressures to the
specified pressure. Refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
6.Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
• Normal maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions. . . . . . . 7-14
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-16
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
• Checking the power steering fluid level . . . . . . . . . 7-25
• Checking the power steering hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Battery capacity label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . 7-39
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Headlamp, position lamp, turn signal lamp,
front fog lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-73
• High mounted stop light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
• License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jump start connector
* The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* The battery is in the trunk.
OBH011100
■
3.8 Engine
Maintenance
47
OBH011101
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jumper terminal
* The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
* The battery is in the trunk.
■
5.0 Engine
75
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
We recommend in general that you
have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered when your vehicle is
covered by warranty.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Service Passport pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, we recommend
that the system be seviced by an
authorized HYUNDAIdealer.
Maintenance
67
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be danger-
ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
maintenance procedures. If
you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, we recommend that the
system be servied by an
authorized HYUNDAIdealer.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is danger-
ous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Therefore, if you must run the
engine while working under
the hood, make certain that
you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watch-
es, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling
fans.
(Continued)
• When checking the engine
room, do not go near fire.
Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are
flammable oils that may cause
fire.
• Before touching the battery,
ignition cables and electrical
wiring, you should disconnect
the battery "-" terminal. You
may get an electric shock
from the electric current.
• When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat head (-)
driver, be careful not to dam-
age the cover.
• Be careful when you replace
and clean bulbs to avoid
burns or electrical shock.
WARNING
• Do not put heavy objects or
apply excessive force on top
of the engine cover (if
equipped) or fuel related
parts.
• When you inspect the fuel
system (fuel lines and fuel
injection devices), we recom-
mend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not drive long time with
the engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
(Continued)
77
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed at the frequencies indicated
to help ensure safe, dependable
operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check automatic transmission P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
Maintenance
87
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-
age.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
79
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, follow
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 96
months or 120,000 km (80,000
miles) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: Driving in summer season temperature over 40°C (104°F - SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,YEMEN
ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must conform the severe driving condition.
*
4
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bot-
tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to
use them. Do not mix other additives.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Drive belts *
1
For Europe I I
Except Europe I I I I
Engine oil and
engine oil filter *
2
For Middle East
Replace every 10,000 km or 12 months *
3
Except Middle East R R R R R R R R
Add fuel additives *
4
For Europe Every 15,000 km or 12 months
Except Europe Every 5,000 km or 6 months
Air cleaner filter
For Middle East,
India
R R R R R R R R
Except Middle East,
India
I I R I I R I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss
of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and we
recommend that you consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Spark plugs
Replace every 165,000 km (110,000 miles) or 120 months *
5
Valve clearance (3.8L) *
5
*
6
I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I
Fuel tank air filter
For Europe I I
Except Europe I R I R
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter*
7
For Europe I I
Except Europe I R I R
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level and leak” every day
Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
8
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
9
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Engine coolant *
8
For Europe
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *
9
Except Europe
At first replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *
9
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
All electrical systems I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Brake pedal I I I I
Parking brake I I I I
Brake fluid
For Europe I R I R I R I R
Except Europe I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid and hoses I I I I I I I I
EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
Inspect
every 20,000 km (12,000 miles)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
10
: Rear differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots
I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints
I I I I I I I I
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R R R R R R R R
Automatic transmission fulid No check, No service required
Exhaust system
I I I I
Rear differential oil *
10
I I
Propeller shaft
I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
147
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
For Middle East R Every 5,000 km or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Except Middle East R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles)
or 6 months
Air cleaner filter I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
A, B, H, I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Automatic transmission fluid
For Europe R Every 90,000 km
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Except Europe R Every 100,000 km
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
715
Maintenance
Parking brake I C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I C, D, E, F
Rear differential oil
R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, E, G, I, J
Propeller shaft I
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
C, E
Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5
miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles)
in freezing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads
H : Towing a trailer (if equipped)
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
Maintenance
167
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
We recommend that the fuel filter be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. We recommend that the fuel
lines, fuel hoses and connections be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals
specified in the maintenance sched-
ule. Make sure that a new vapor hose
or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the
belt, press the engine start/stop
button to the OFF or ACC posi-
tion.
717
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner
filter be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance (3.8L)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary.
We recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transmission fluid
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions.
We recommend that the automatic
transmission fluid be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
✽
NOTICE
Automatic transmission fluid color
is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transmission fluid will begin
to look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transmission fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is
hot. You may burn yourself.
Maintenance
187
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evi-
dence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, refer to
the Hyundai web site.
(http://brakemanual.hmc.co.kr)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
719
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1.Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2.Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4.Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5.Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level.The level should be
between F and L.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
OBH071002
OBH071002N
3.8L
5.0L
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil.
If you drop the engine oil on
the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with
a clean cloth. When mixed
with debris, it can cause
engine damage.
Maintenance
207
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
We recommend that the engine oil
and filter be replaced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap
and warm water as soon as pos-
sible after handling used oil.
OBH071003
OBH071003N
3.8L
5.0L
721
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radi-
ator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out
under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
• Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water
pump failure and engine
seizure, etc.
Maintenance
227
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should
be filled between F and L
marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when
the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If fre-
quent additions are required, we rec-
ommend that the system be inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
OBH071004
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling
fan) may operate until you dis-
connect the negative battery
cable.
723
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OBH072005L
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure causing serious
injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as the gener-
ator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Maintenance
247
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
or capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
✽
NOTICE
Before removing the brake filler
cap, read the warning on the cap.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding
brake fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact
with your eyes. If brake fluid
should come in contact with
your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of
fresh tap water. Have your eyes
examined by a doctor as soon
as possible.
WARNING - Loss of
brake fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of
fluid, we recommend that the
system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake
fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of
fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
OBH071006
WARNING
Clean filler cap before remov-
ing. Use only DOT3 or DOT4
brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
725
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking the power steering
fluid level
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the side of the gauge
at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steer-
ing fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
In the event the power steering sys-
tem requires frequent addition of
fluid, we recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified power steer-
ing fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants or capacities" in section
8.)
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering water pump unit, do
not operate the vehicle for
prolonged periods with a low
power steering fluid level.
• Never start the engine when
the reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful
that dirt does not get into the
tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort
and/or noise from the power
steering system.
• The use of the non-specified
fluid could reduce the effective-
ness of the power steering sys-
tem and cause damage to it.
OBH078022
Maintenance
267
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
damage and twists in the power
steering hose before driving.
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and
animals. Do not drink and
avoid contacting windshield
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
OBH078008
WASHER FLUID
727
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
Main air cleaner
1.Push the top of the fastener to
remove the cover.
2.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
3.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
4.Replace the air cleaner filter.
5.Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
OBH071010
OBH078010N
3.8L
5.0L
OVI079117L
OBH071011
Maintenance
287
Chamber air cleaner (if equipped)
1.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2.Replace the air cleaner filter after
pulling up the locking tab (1).
3.Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
OBH071051
OVI072052
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When you clean the filter, use
the compressed air and blow
the air from the clean side to
the dirty side.
729
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
Filter replacement
1.With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to allow
the glove box to hang freely on the
hinges.
2.Remove the cylinder at the left of
the glove box.
OVI079015
OVI079016
Maintenance
307
3.Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case pulling out both sides of
the cover.
4.Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5.Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter, install it properly.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the fil-
ter may be reduced.
OBH078016 OBH078017
731
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
1JBA5122
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
327
Front windshield wiper blade
For your convenience, move the
windshield wiper blades to the serv-
ice position as follows;
Turn the engine start/stop button off.
Move the wiper switch to the single
wiping (MIST/ ) position within 20
seconds and hold the switch until the
wiper blade is in the fully up position.
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Open the cover of the blade. Press
the clip behind the wiper arm and
remove the blade assembly down-
ward.
OHM078059
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
OHM078060
733
Maintenance
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
6. Move the wiper switch to any posi-
tion and then to the OFF position.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift
up the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
OHG070043
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
OHM078059
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
Maintenance
347
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
OSBL071002
735
Maintenance
For best battery service
The battery is in the trunk.
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
BATTERY
OBH071018N
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the follow-
ing instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 min-
utes and get immediate
medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on
your skin, thoroughly
wash the contacted area.
If you feel a pain or a
burning sensation, get
medical attention imme-
diately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be
harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
Maintenance
367
Battery capacity label
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI
model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah (20HR) : The nominal
capacity (in
Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve
capacity (in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in per-
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
CAUTION
• When you don’t use the vehi-
cle for a long time in the low
temperature area, separate
the battery and keep it
indoors.
The power trunk is not closed
completely when the battery is
separated. When you separate
the battery from the vehicle,
refer to "Power trunk" in sec-
tion 4.
• Always charge the battery
fully to prevent the battery
case damaged in low tempera-
ture area.
• If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the bat-
tery, the battery may be dis-
charged. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
WARNING
We recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OJD072039
■ Example
737
Maintenance
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
(Continued)
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery ter-
minal.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the bat-
tery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order.
(Continued)
Maintenance
387
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Power trunk (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See DIS manual)
• Audio (See DIS manual)
• Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See section 4)
CAUTION
• Keep the battery away from
water or any liquid.
• The battery is in the trunk, so
you should be careful when
you load a container filled with
liquid into the trunk.
• For your safety, use the
authenticity by approved
authorized HYUNDAI dealer,
when you replace the battery.
WARNING
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
• Operation related to the bat-
tery should be done in an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
739
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire under-
inflation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OBH088004N
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
Maintenance
407
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
WARNING - Tire
Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
741
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too lit-
tle pressure wear unevenly
causing poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden
tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold
tire pressure for your vehicle
can be found in this manual
and on the tire label located
on the driver's side center pil-
lar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
Maintenance
427
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance. In most
cases, you will not need to have your
wheels aligned again. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehi-
cle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If
you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
WARNING
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause unusu-
al handling characteristics that
could result in death, severe
injury, or property damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
CBGQ0706
S2BLA790A
Without a spare tire
With a full size spare tire
743
Maintenance
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI’s specifications
may fit poorly and result in
damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor
vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
CAUTION
When replacing the tires,
recheck and tighten the wheel
nuts after driving about 1,000
km (620 miles). If the steering
wheel shakes or the vehicle
vibrates while driving, the tire is
out of balance. Align the tire bal-
ance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Maintenance
447
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
745
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P245/50R18 100V
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
245 - Tire width in millimeters.
50 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
100 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.5JX18
7.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
467
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
4. Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
747
Maintenance
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
487
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high tempera-
ture can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and sudden tire failure.
This can cause loss of vehicle
control and serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
(Continued)
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
(Continued)
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
749
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 4 fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bol-
ster, another is in the front passen-
ger’s side panel bolster, the others
are in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and we
recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and fusible link for higher
amperage ratings.
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
OBH072060
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Fusible link
Blown
Blown
Normal
Blown
Maintenance
507
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1.Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position.
2.Open the fuse panel cover.
3.Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the driver's side panel or front
passenger's side panel.
OVI073100
OBH078020
Front passenger’s side
Driver’s side
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips. The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays
and terminals may be fas-
tened incompletely, and it may
cause a possible fire. If fuses,
relays and terminals fastened
with bolts or nuts are blown,
we recommend that you con-
sult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system
malfunction.
OVI073101
OBH078021
Driver’s side
Front passenger’s side
751
Maintenance
4.Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
passenger compartment panel
fuse panel (or in the engine com-
partment fuse panel).
5.Push in a new fuse of the same rat-
ing, and make sure it fits tightly in
the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
the smart key may not work properly.
OVI073102
CAUTION
• Always place the fuse switch
in the ON position while driv-
ing the vehicle.
• Do not move the transporta-
tion fuse switch repeatedly.
The fuse switch may be worn
out.
Maintenance
527
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1.Turn the engine start/stop button
and all other switches off.
2.Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
3.Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
front passenger’s side panel.
4.Push in a new fuse of the same rat-
ing, and make sure it fits tightly in
the clips. If it fits loosely, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Remove the fuse panel on the
right side in the engine compart-
ment.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽
NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
OBH078025
OBH071023
OBH071024
753
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Instrument fuse panel
(Driver’s side)
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OVI073108L
OVI073105
Maintenance
547
Symbol Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
PDM B+ 25A Smart Key Control Module
Hazard 10A Center Facia Switch
EPB 10A Electric Parking Brake Switch, Crash Pad Switch
RF Receiver 10A RF Receiver, Security Indicator
PDM IG1 10A Smart Key Control Module
Shift Lever IG1 10A Electric ATM Shift Lever, ATM Shift Lever IND.
Air Bag IND. 10A Instrument Cluster
Smart Key 10A Start/Stop Button Switch
Power Handle 15A Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module
Memory 10A
Power Trunk Lid Control Module, Relax Module Driver/Passenger Door Module, Rear Door
Module LH/RH, Passenger Door Lamp, Passenger Door Mood Lamp, Rear Door Lamp LH/RH,
Rear Door Mood Lamp LH/RH, Instrument Cluster, Driver IMS Control Module, BCM, Analogue
Clock, LCD Panel Switch, A/C Control Module, Data Link Connector
TPMS 10A Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
Active Head
Rest
10A Active Head Rest Sensor Module
Cluster 10A Instrument Cluster, Head-Up Display
Stop Lamp 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
755
Maintenance
Symbol Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
Shift Lever B+ 10A Electric ATM Shift Lever, Sport Mode Switch
Multi Media 15A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Front Monitor, Split Unit, MTS Module, Front DIS Switch, Rear
Monitor LH/RH, Rear Console Switch, Rear Audio Switch
BCM 10A BCM
IG1 30A
E/R Junction Box (Fuse - B/UP LAMP, ESC, EHPS, AFLS, INJECTOR (IG1), CRUISE
(IG1), ECU (IG1), TCU)
Module 1 10A Head-Up Display, Rain Sensor, Rear Power Seat Switch RH
Fuel Lid 10A Fuel Filler Door Switch, Front Console Switch
Folding Mirror 10A Driver/Passenger Door Module
Air Bag 15A SRS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Pre-Safe Seat Belt
Module 4 10A E/R Junction Box (FAM), Multifunction Switch, Driver/Passenger Door Module
ECS 15A ECS Control Module
Audio (IG1) 10A A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module
AFLS 10A
Head Lamp LH/RH, Adaptive Front Lighting Module, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device
Module
P/Door Driver 15A
Driver Power Door Latch, Driver Power Seat Switch, Driver Door Lamp, Driver Door Mood
Lamp, Driver Smart Key Outside Handle
Rear LH S/Heater 15A Rear CCS Control Module LH, Rear Seat Warmer Module LH
Module 2 10A
Power Trunk Lid Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Electric Parking Brake Switch,
A/T Console Switch
Maintenance
567
Symbol Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
A/CON 10A
A/C Control Module, AQS Sensor, Driver IMS Control Module, Relax Module,
Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Rear CCS
Control, Module LH/RH, Rear Seat Warmer Module LH/RH, Alternator Resistor (Alternator,
Instrument Cluster, USB Jack, Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Rear Console
Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Rear CCS Control Module LH/RH, Rear
Seat Warmer Module LH/RH)
P/Door Rear LH 15A
Rear Power Door Latch LH, Rear Door Window Curtain LH, Rear Smart Key Outside
Handle LH
Module 3 10A
ECS Control Module, Front Console Switch, Crash Pad Switch, Blind Spot Detection Radar
LH/RH, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Steering Tilt & Telescopic
Module, LDWS Camera Module, Electric Parking Brake Module, Front/Rear Parking Assist
Sensor LH/RH, Front/Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH (Center)
IAP 10A Active Accel Pedal Module
Driver D/Lock 10A Driver Door Module
Driver S/Heater 15A Driver CCS Control Module, Driver Seat Warmer Module
Passenger D/Lock 15A Passenger Door Module
Power Trunk Lid 30A Power Trunk Lid Control Module
Passenger P/Seat 30A Relax Module
Safety Window RH 30A Passenger Power Window Module, Rear Power Window Module RH
Safety Window LH 30A Driver Power Window Module, Rear Power Window Module LH
757
Maintenance
Instrument fuse panel (Passenger’s side)
OVI073160L
OBH071027
Maintenance
587
Symbol Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
USB Charge 10A USB Jack (6:4 Seat)
IG2 30A E/R Junction Box (Fuse - WIPER (IG2), WASHER)
A/CON 10A
E/R Junction Box (Blower Relay), A/C Control Module, Ionizer, Active Incar Sensor, LCD
Panel Switch
Module 10A Smart Junction Box LH (IG2 Power), Around View Unit, Camera Module
Rear P/Seat 20A Rear Power Seat Relay Box LH, Rear Seat Lumbar Support Control Module LH
E-Shifter 10A USB Jack (6:4 Seat), Electric ATM Shift Lever
PDM ACC 10A Smart Key Control Module, BCM
Sunroof 20A Sunroof Motor
PDM IG2 10A Smart Key Control Module, BCM
Rear P/Outlet 20A
6:4 Seat - Rear Power Outlet #1/#2,
5:5 Seat - Rear Power Outlet, Rear Accessory Socket
Room Lamp 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Power Outlet FRT Relay), Front Room Lamp
Rear P/Door 15A
Rear Power Door Latch RH, Rear Door Window Curtain RH, Rear Smart Key Outside Handle
RH
Audio 10A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Analogue Clock, Split Unit, Front Monitor, AMP, MTS Module,
Front DIS Switch, Camera Module, Around View Unit, Rear Monitor LH/RH, Rear Audio
Switch, Rear Console Switch (6:4 Seat)
759
Maintenance
Symbol Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
Rear L/Support 15A Rear Power Seat Relay Box RH, Rear Seat Lumbar Support Control Module RH
Passenger
S/Heat
15A Passenger CCS Control Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module
Steering
W/Heated
15A Clock Spring (Steering Wheel Remote Control - Steering Wheel Heated Module)
Cool Box 15A Cool Box, Rear Console Swtich, Rear Seat Lumbar Support Control Module RH
Passenger
P/Door
15A
Passenger Power Door Latch, Passenger Power Seat Switch, Passenger Smart Key Outside
Handle
Rear RH
S/Heat
15A Rear CCS Control Module RH, Rear Seat Warmer Module RH
Maintenance
607
Engine compartment fuse panel (Driver’s side)
OVI073103
OVI073107N
761
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
ALT 200A
Alternator, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - I/P POWER RH, EHPS, C/FAN, PDM (ACC), ECS, TRUNK, AMP,
H/LAMP WASHER, VACUUM PUMP, POWER OUTLET FRT)
I/P POWER LH 80A
Smart Junction Box LH (Fuse - F1/F2/F3/F4/F8/F9/F12/F15/F17/F18/F22/F23/F29/F32/F33/F36/F40/F41/
F44/F45/F46/F47/F48, Leak Current Autocut Device)
I/P POWER RH 60A I/P Junction Box RH (Fuse - F2/F9/F12/F17/F20/F21/F25/F26)
C/FAN 70A C/FAN Relay
EHPS 80A EHPS Module
ESC 1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ESC 2 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
PDM (IG1) 40A PDM (IG1) Relay
PDM (IG2) 30A PDM (IG2) Relay
P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver IMS Control Module, Driver Lumbar Support Valve
ECS 40A ECS Relay
AMP 30A AMP
PDM (ACC) 30A PDM (ACC) Relay
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
B/UP LAMP 10A B/UP LAMP Relay
H/LAMP WASHER 20A H/LAMP WASHER Relay
VACUUM PUMP 20A VACUUM PUMP Relay
POWER OUTLET
FRT
25A POWER OUTLET FRT Relay
TRUNK 10A TRUNK Relay
Maintenance
627
Engine compartment fuse panel (Passenger’s side)
OVI073104
OVI073109N
763
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
WIPER (B+) 30A Electronic Control Wiper Module
FAM 2 (B+) 40A FAM
FAM 1 (B+) 40A FAM
START 30A Start Relay
WASHER 15A Washer Relay
WIPER (IG2) 10A Electronic Control Wiper Module
DEICER 15A Deicer Relay
CRUISE (B+) 10A H/Lamp Relay, Smart Cruise Control Module
HORN 15A Horn Relay
EPB 2 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
EPB 1 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
A/CON 10A A/C Control Module
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
PRESAFETY
SEAT BELT LH
40A Driver Pre-Safe Seat Belt
RR HTD 40A RR HTD Relay
PRESAFETY
SEAT BELT RH
40A Passenger Pre-Safe Seat Belt
ECU (IG1) 10A ECM, Alternator (G8BE)
ESC 10A ESC Module, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Multipurpose Check Connector)
EHPS 10A EHPS Module
AFLS 10A Head Lamp LH/RH
TCU 15A TCM, Transmission Range Switch, Transmission Park Position Sensor & Switch
HTD MIRR 10A Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
F/PUMP 20A F/Pump Relay
Maintenance
647
Fuse Name Fuse rating Protected component
ROOM LAMP 10A Room Lamp Relay
ECU (B+) 15A ECM/TCM, Injector Drive Box (G6DJ)
B/UP LAMP 10A
Alternator (G6DJ), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Vacuum Pump Relay (G6DJ), B/Up Lamp Relay, P/N Relay),
Steering Angle Sensor, Brake Vacuum Switch (G6DJ)
CRUISE (IG1) 10A Smart Cruise Control Module
INJECTOR (IG1) 10A Injector Drive Box
H/LAMP LH 15A Head Lamp LH
H/LAMP RH 15A Head Lamp RH
SENSOR 3 10A ECM, F/Pump Relay, Camshaft Position Sensor (BANK1/BANK2) (Intake/Exhaust) (G8BE)
SENSOR 2 10A
ECM (G6DJ), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve (G6DJ), Canister Purge Solenoid Valve (G6DJ), Oil Control
Valve #1 ~ #4 E/R Fuse & Relay Box (C/Fan Relay), Purge Control Solenoid Valve (G8BE)
SENSOR 1 10A ECM, Oxygen Sensor #1 ~ #4
INJECTOR (B+) 15A Injector Drive Box
IGN COIL 20A Condenser #1/#2, Ignition Coil #1 ~ #6 (G6DJ), Ignition Coil #1 ~ #8 (G8BE)
ECU 30A ECU Relay
765
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
ing, headlamp and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition
is caused by the temperature differ-
ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con-
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and the
expertise, we recommend that
you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.
This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlam-
passembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the head-
lamp assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
Maintenance
667
Headlamp, position lamp, turn
signal lamp, front fog lamp
bulb replacement
(1) Headlamp (High)
(2) Headlamp (Low)
(3) Position lamp
(4) Front turn signal light
(5) Front fog light (if equipped)
1.Open the hood.
2.Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Push the top of the fastener to
remove the cover.
4.Remove the cover.
OVI072100C
OVI079030
OVI070045
Type A
Type B
767
Maintenance
5. Pull out the cover.
6. Insert the driver into the hold (1)
and lift up the driver while pull out
the cover (2).
7. Remove the fastener and screw
under the wheel arch.
8. Pull out the bumper.
OVI079113L
OVI079114L
OVI079103LOVI079102L
Maintenance
687
9. Remove 4 fasteners on the grille
and the bolt.
10. Remove the front bumper.
11. Be careful not to break up the
clips on the inside of the front
bumper.
12. If you want to replace the right
side head lamp, remove the bolts
then remove the air cleaner.
OVI079104L
OVI079105L
OVI079106L OVI079107L
769
Maintenance
13. Remove the mounting bolts.
14. Pull the headlamp assembly out
to the front of the vehicle.
15. Remove the clips.
16. Disconnect the power connec-
tor(s) from the back of the head-
lamp assembly.
Headlamp (HID/LED type) bulb
replacement
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OVI079108L
OVI079109L
OVI079110L
WARNING -
HID/LED Headlamp low
beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb/ LED) due to electric shock
danger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb/LED) is not working, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
707
✽
NOTICE
HID/LED lamps have superior per-
formance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID/LED lamps are estimated by
the manufacturer to last twice as
long or longer than halogen bulbs
depending on their frequency of use.
They will probably require replace-
ment at some point in the life of the
vehicle. Cycling the headlamps on
and off more than typical use will
shorten HID/LED lamps life. HID/
LED lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after
a period of operation but will imme-
diately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the
HID/LED lamp needs to be
replaced. HID/LED lighting compo-
nents are more complex than con-
ventional halogen bulbs thus have
higher replacement cost.
Headlamp bulb (High)
OHD076046
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never
touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed
in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
771
Maintenance
17. Remove the headlamp bulb
cover by turning it counter clock-
wise.
18. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket connector.
19. Unsnap the headlamp bulb
retaining wire by depressing the
end and pushing it upward.
20. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
21. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
22. Connect the headlamp bulb
socket connector.
23. Install the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it clockwise.
24. Connect the power connector(s)
to the back of the headlamp
assembly.
25. Reinstall the headlamp assembly
to the body of the vehicle.
✽
NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight
aiming be adjusted after an accident
or after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric.
If you go abroad to a country with
opposite traffic direction, this asym-
metric part will dazzle oncoming car
driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regu-
lation demand several technical solu-
tions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet,
down aiming). This headlamps are
designed not to dazzle opposite driv-
ers. So, you need not change your
headlamps in a country with oppo-
site traffic direction.
OVI079111L
CAUTION
If the headlamp (Low) is not
operating, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
727
Turn signal light
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is equipped with the
LED type, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Position lamp
If the lamp is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Front fog light bulb replacement
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Side repeater light bulb
replacement (if equipped)
If the light bulb is not operating, we
recommend that the vehicle be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OVI073031
773
Maintenance
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Back-up light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Rear fog light (if equipped)
(5) Rear reflex-Reflector
Rear Back-up light
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn signal, stop and tail light,
rear fog light (if equipped)
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
High mounted stop light
replacement
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OVI073032
OVI073035
Maintenance
747
License plate light bulb
replacement
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Interior light bulb replacement
If the light is not operating, we rec-
ommend that the vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
OVI079039
775
Maintenance
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chem-
ical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
Maintenance
767
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits or engine and related
part located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents and air duct inside the
vehicle as this may damage
them.
OJB037800
777
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on the under-
body parts such as the fuel lines,
frame, floor pan and exhaust system,
even though they have been treated
with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of the doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not clog with
dirt; trapped water in these areas can
cause rusting.
Maintenance
787
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads.This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the long-
term corrosion resistance your vehi-
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
tion and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
779
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your car clean and free of mud
or accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible
surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
Maintenance
807
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent it.
Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your car in the garage or drive it into
the garage when it is still wet or cov-
ered with snow, ice or mud. Even a
heated garage can contribute to cor-
rosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. See the
instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
781
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
Maintenance
827
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Service
Passport in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control
system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Contol (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Contol (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
783
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or perform-
ance problems resulting from any
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
Maintenance
847
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park, idle,
or drive the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such
as grass, vegetation, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and cat-
alytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and cat-
alytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
785
Maintenance
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Load and speed capacity tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Weight and Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-5
• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS BULB WATTAGE
* : if equipped
*
1
: with air suspension
Item Sedan Limousine
Overall length 5,160 (203.1)
5,460 (214.9)
Overall width 1,890 (74.4)
Overall height 1,495 (58.8)/1,490 (58.6) *
1
Wheelbase 3,045 (119.8)
Front tread
245/50R18 1,616 (63.6)
245/45R19 1,620 (63.7)
Rear tread
245/50R18 1,633 (64.2)/1,634 (64.3) *
1
245/45R19 1,637 (64.4)/1,638 (64.4) *
1
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlamp (Low) 35 (HID) or LED
Headlamp (High) 55
Front turn signal lights LED
Position lamp LED
Side repeater lights* LED
Front fog lights* LED
Welcome light* LED
Rear fog light* LED
Stop and tail lights LED
Tail light LED
Rear turn signal lights LED
Back-up lights LED
High mounted stop light* LED
License plate lights LED
Map lamps LED
Room lamps LED
Luggage lamp LED
Glove box lamp LED
Vanity mirror lamps* LED
Door courtesy lamps* LED
mm (in.)
3
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
* Normal load : Up to 3 persons
❈ When you drive over 160km/h, inflate the tire pressure to 2.48 bar (36 psi, 248 kPa).
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut
torque kg•m
(lb•ft, N•m)
Normal load * Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
245/50R18 7.5J×18
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
2.2
(32, 220)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
245/45R19 8.0J×19
2.05
(30, 205)
2.05
(30, 205)
2.05
(30, 205)
2.05
(30, 205)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
8
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
Item Tire size Wheel size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tire
245/50R18 7.5J×18 100 800 V 240
245/45R19 8.0Jx19 98 750 V 240
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TIRES
Specifications & Consumer information
48
WEIGHT AND VOLUME
Item
General Europe
3.8L
3.8L
Limousine
5.0L
5.0L
Limousine
3.8L
3.8L
Limousine
5.0L
5.0L
Limousine
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
2430
(5357)
2500
(5511)
2530
(5577)
2550
(5621)
2420
(5335)
-
2510
(5533)
2570
(5665)
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
474 (26.3)
85
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
3.8L
5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)
API Service SM *
3
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above,
ACEA A5
5.0L
7.2 l (7.61 US qt.)
Engine oil consumption
Normal driving condition
MAX. 1 l /1500 km
-
Severe driving condition
MAX. 1 l /1000 km
-
Automatic transmission fluid
10.1 l (10.67 US qt.)
GS ATF SP-IV-RR,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV-RR
Power steering
0.9 l (0.95 US qt.)
Pentosin CHF 202
Coolant
3.8L
10.1 l (10.67 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum
radiator)
5.0L
12.1 l (12.79 US qt.)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
SAE J1703, FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil
1.4 l (1.48 US qt.)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X Equivalent)
Fuel
77 l (20.34 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*
1
: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
: If the API service SM or ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL or ACEA A3.
Specifications & Consumer information
68
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-30 (API SM/ILSAC GF-4/ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your
country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-20*
2
, 5W-30
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30
5.0L
3.8L
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20*
2
(API SM/ILSAC GF-4/ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your
country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
: In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
87
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on floor
under the passenger’s seat.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s (or front pas-
senger’s) side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
OBH088001
OBH088005N
VIN label (if equipped)
Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OVI089002
Specifications & Consumer information
88
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, suppli-
er part number, production number,
refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
OBH088004N
ENGINE NUMBER
OBH081003
OBH081010
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
OHC081001
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The radio frequency components of
the vehicle comply with requirements
and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1995/5/EC.
Further information including the
manufacturer's declaration of con-
formity is available on HYUNDAI web
site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
CE0678
■ Example
